Home

LG 42LE4900 42" Full HD Black LCD TV

1. ee e a Lopi without stand 799 0 mm x 506 0 mm x 73 5 mm 916 0 mm x 575 0 mm x 77 4 mm TA vit f a A ees without stand 8 1 kg 10 8 kg Power requirement AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz Power Consumption 120 W 160 W 42LD4 MODELS 42LD480 ZB 42LD490 ZB Dimensions with stand 1023 0 mm x 685 0 mm x 261 0 mm ooo o sssssssssuuussssssssscenecscssccgcegeesensuuussssssnsnnessssegcggceceeeenesstusuuunsessssssssacasseneeessrsrsasaccgcggegeeneensnstunsnunsesssssissssenseeeeseeset Depth without stand 1023 0 mm x 635 0 mm x 76 6 mm m oe renee e Weight l without stand 13 5 kg Power requirement AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz Power Consumption 190 W CI Module Size Width x Height x Depth Operatin eas ae Environment condition Operating Humidity a o Pe PAE AE elope ees E ENEE TT i ieee Be OO eee Supported movie files Refer to p 96 to 97 XIGNAddV i m The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement 191 XIGNAddV i 192 APPENDIX WO B HRS Dimensions Width x Height x Depth with stand without stand with stand Weight op without stand Power requirement Power Consumption WO D HRS Dimensions Width x Height x Depth with stand without stand with stand without stand Weight Power requirement Power Consumption CI Module Size Width x Height x Depth Operating Temperature Environment condition Operating Hum
2. Start up your computer and insert the Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials CD ROM into your compu ters CD ROM drive An installation wizard will walk you through the quick and uncomplicated installation process 2 Close all Microsoft Windows programmes and exit any anti virus software that may be running Insert the Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials CD ROM into your computer s CD ROM drive 4 Click Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials The installation is prepared and the installation wizard appears D Click the Next button to display the serial number input screen Click Next to go to the next step 6 If you accept all conditions click accept the License Conditions check box and click Next Installation is not possible without this agreement Click Typical and click Next The installation process is started 8 If you want to take part in the anonymous collection of data select the check box and click the Next button Q Click the Exit button to complete the installation JDIAAG Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL p JDIAAG Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL i 94 TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE Sharing files and folders After installing Nero MediaHome you must add folders you wish to share 14 Double click the Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials icon on the desktop 2 Click Network icon on the left and define your network name in the Network name field The Network name you enter will be recognized by your TV Click Shares icon on the left Click Local Folders tab
3. Mono sound selection If the stereo signal is weak in stereo reception you can switch to mono In mono reception the clarity of sound is improved m Language selection for dual language broadcast lf a programme can be received in two languages dual language you can switch to DUAL I DUAL II or DUAL I II DUAL I Sends the primary broadcast language to the loudspeakers DUAL Il Sends the secondary broadcast language to the loudspeakers DUAL I II Sends a separate language to each loudspeaker NICAM RECEPTION IN ANALOGUE MODE ONLY If the TV is equipped with a receiver for NICAM reception high quality NICAM Near Instantaneous Companding Audio Multiplex digital sound can be received Sound output can be selected according to the type of broadcast received When NICAM mono is received you can select NICAM MONO or FM MONO 2 When NICAM stereo is received you can select NICAM STEREO or FM MONO If the stereo signal is weak switch to FM MONO When NICAM dual is received you can select NICAM DUAL I NICAM DUAL Il or NICAM DUAL I II or FM MONO SPEAKER SOUND OUTPUT SELECTION In AV Component RGB and HDMI mode you can select output sound for the left and right loudspeakers Select the sound output L R Audio signal from audio L input is sent to the left loudspeaker and audio signal from audio R input is sent to the right loudspeaker L L Audio signal from audio L input is sent to left and right loudspeak
4. Power Indicator e Power Indicator y oF Factory Reset e Factory Reset Power Light Set ID 4 o Set ID e Mode Setting Home Use e Mode Setting e IR Blaster Off e IR Blaster el Select OPTION Select Power Indicator S see Standby Light or Power Light 7 D Select your desired Source e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen IMAGE STICKING MINIMIZATION ISM METHOD PLASMA TV ONLY A frozen or still picture displayed on the screen for prolonged periods will result in a ghost image remaining even when you change the image Avoid allowing a fixed image to remain on the screen for prolonged periods White Wash White wash removes permanent images from the screen Note An excessive permanent image may be impossible to clear entirely with White Wash Orbiter Orbiter may help prevent ghost images However it is best not to allow any fixed image to remain on the screen To avoid a permanent image on the screen the screen will move every 2 minutes Colour Wash The color block with the screen moved a little and the white pattern are alternately displayed It is difficult to sense the afterimage occurred while the temporary afterimage is removed and the colour pattern is operating OPTION OP nen e Language Language e Country UK e Disability Assistance a e ISM Method Normal e Factory
5. Select OPTION Select MHP Auto start _ Select On or Off Wy J e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen u When MHP Auto Start is set to On Display the MHP u When MHP Auto Start is set to Off Display the MHP Application List 8 Select your desired MHP broadcast e Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen JOYLNOO ANWVESDOdd AL ONIHOLVM 5 61 WATCHING TV PROGRAMME CONTROL SIMPLINK This function operates only with devices with the SIMPLINK logo Please check the SIMPLINK logo This TV might not function properly when using it with other products with HDMI CEC function This allows you to control and play other AV devices connected to the display through HDMI cable without additional cables and settings If you do not want SIMPLINK menu select Off In wireless external output SIMPLINK function is not supported SimPLink OK Exit lt On P Watch TV DISC SZ VCR HDD Recorder lt Speaker gt TV Speaker TOYLNOO ANWVESDOdd AL ONIHOLVM E Display the SIMPLINK Select On or Off Save e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen 62 Connecting to Home Theater with the SIMPLINK logo D Connect the HD
6. LG Life s Good OWNER S MANUAL LCD TV LED LCD TV PLASMA TV Please read this manual carefully before operating your set and retain it for future reference www lg com OPE Separate purchase Wall Mounting Bracket LSW400B or LSW100B or E ed Lennoece Se R or LSW100BG DSW400B or LSW200BXG DSW400BG 7 37 42LE4 ee SS 47LXQ 37 42 47LE5 Bo uct 32LE4 32LE5 37 42 47LE7 32LE 32LD4 42 47LE8 37 42LD4 32LD6 32LD7 37 42 47LD6 32LD8 42 47LD7 37 42LD8 42 47LX6 5SLE5 55LET 55LES s 55LD6 55LXQ PSW400B or PSW400BG or PSW600B or PSW600BG DSW400BG o o S D p o o o 60PK5 6 OPK7 GOPK9 G0PX9 50PK5 50PK7 50PK9 50PX9 Optional extras can be changed or modified for quality improvement without any notification Contact your dealer for buying these items This device only works with compatible LG LED LCD TV LCD TV or Plasma TV Wireless LAN for Broadband Wireless Media Box DLNA Adaptor Except for Except for 50 60PK950 32 37 42LD4 50 60PK950N 50 60PK980 50 60PK990 50 60PX950N 50 60PX980 50 60PX990 HDMI the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or regis tered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC Homi CONTENTS PREPARATION LED LCD TV Models 32 37 42LE4 32 37 42 47 55LE5
7. Bluetooth off i ae hi d Bluetooth headset is connected Bluetooth off PLT 510 da _ 00 19 7f ff 4a 1a Cancel A Disconnect fe E SN F Do you want to disconnect headset y PLT 510 00 19 7f ff 4a 1a Disconnect Disconnect the Bluetooth headset e Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen When requesting to connect to TV from the Bluetooth headset When the Bluetooth menu is On and there is a connection request from the headset this message is displayed Not all headsets support the this feature Refer to the user manual of Po you want to use your headset the applicable Bluetooth headset Some headset types may make an attempt at connection when they are turned off on even though they are not included in the Registered Device list a oe 1 1 Ve _ A J S N I wo le ft Select Yes or No rA A NOTE gt LG recommends the following headset mod gt Connection that is lost due to the TV being els turned off etc will not be automatically recov Plantronics VOYAGER 855 SONY HBH ered Try connecting the applicable device DS970 HBH DS980 Motorola S605 again gt Some operations can be slower while operat ing the headset gt Even if you choose simplink Home Theater after using the headset during Simplink opera tion the unit will not automatically swit
8. n e Booster e CI Information al a m AUDIO e Auto Volume Off e Clear Voice II Off 3 e Balance 0 CMR iors e OnTime e Sound Mode Standard e Sleep Timer e Infinite Sound Off e Treble 50 E Bass 50 E e Racot JOYLNOOD JIWWYH9O d AL ONIHOLVM N TOYLNOOD ANWVESDOdd AL ONIHOLVM E WATCHING TV PROGRAMME CONTROL Lock E g e Set Password e Lock System Off e Block Programme e Language Language e Country UK e Disability Assistance e Parental Guidance Blocking Off e Power Indicator e Input Block e Key Lock Off e Factory Reset e Set ID e Mode Setting e IR Blaster oa Home Use For further information refer to the optional Wireless Media Box manual for operating instructions Except for 32 37 42LD4 die Exit NETWORK Bluetooth e Network Setting Wired e Network Status Internet is connected d Bluetooth on Bluetooth is off BLUE Select Bluetooth On on the left to turn on Bluetooth e Legal Notice Except for 32 37 42LE4 32 37 42 47 55LES 42 47LE73 32 37 42LD4 32 37 42 47 55LD6 32 42 47LD7 32 37 42LD8 42 47LX6 47 55LX9 50 60PK5 50 60PX9 See a 2 PP bila shpat I H a JUMP HOLE INONE WHACKAMOLE SUDOKU COOKING BURGER g ip Music List Movie List Photo List So P
9. Auto Tuning Service Operator Comhem e Programme Edit e Programme Edit a g e Programme Edi 4 Other Operators e Booster e Booster f mere gern e Booster e Manual Tuning e Manual Tuning Drea i e Manual Tuning e Cl Information Co e Cl Information 7 7 e Cl Information Fe previous Next e Cable DTV Setting ai GE e Cable DTV Setting if you select antenna or cable po J e Cable DTV Setting existing channel information is l deleted Antenna Close e Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4 digit password in Lock System On e When you select the Cable the Cable Select Auto Tuning Service Operator selection screen can differ or not exist by the Cable situation of the applicable country Select Cable e The popup window to select between Service Operator is only shown initially for the 3 cases when you accessing the Select Comhem or Other Initial Setting menu when you change Operators from Antenna to Cable or when you access the menu after changing the Select Quick or Full country e When you want to select between Service Operator aside from the above 3 cases you can do so by selecting Setup gt Cable DTV Setting gt Service Operator Select SETUP e Acquired certification SO Sweden Comhem Canal Digital Denmark YouSee Canal Digital Stofa Norway Canal Digital Netherlands Ziggo Except for 42 47LX6 47 55LX9 50 60PX9 Ukraine Volia Cable Except for 42 47
10. Ga CE C CO Co J er Ww ce BACK EXIT g DDoS D CE GD ED CL J er POWER ENERGY SAVING AV MODE TV RAD NetCast THUMBSTICK Up Down Left Right OK GUIDE Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby Adjust the Energy Saving mode of the TV gt p 138 It helps you select and set images and sounds when connecting AV devices gt p 66 External input mode rotate in regular sequence gt p 57 Selects Radio TV and DIV programme Selects a menu Clears all on screen displays and returns to TV viewing from any menu gt p 31 Select the desired NetCast menu source gt p 68 AccuWeather Picasa YouTube and etc NetCast menu source can differ by country Select the desired quick menu source Aspect Ratio Clear Voice II Picture Mode Sound Mode Audio or Audio Language Sleep Timer Skip Off On USB Device p 30 Allows you to navigate the on screen menus and adjust the system settings to your preference Accepts your selection or displays the current mode Allows the user to move return one step in an inter active application EPG or other user interaction function Clears all on screen displays and returns to TV viewing from any menu Shows programme guide p 129 INFO Shows the present screen information AD Switches the Audio Description On or Off APP Select the MHP TV menu source Only Italy Only 32 37 42LD48
11. If connected to COMPONENT IN 2 select Componentz2 input source gt HDMI Audio Supported format Dolby Digital PCM DTS Audio format is not supported zi i zi a gt io a fe f os gt Oo Ee Signal Component 480i 576i O X 480p 576p O O 720p 1080i O O O O 1080p 24 Hz 30 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz only 50 Hz 60 Hz Component Input ports To achieve better picture quality connect a DVD player to the component input ports as shown below Component ports on the TV Y iia Video output ports on DVD player CONNECTING WITH AN HDMI CABLE D Connect the HDMI output of the external equipment digital set top box DVD etc to HDMI DVI IN 1 DVI HDMI DVI IN 2 HDMI DVI IN 3 or HDMI IN 4 Except for 32 37 42LD4 32 37 42 47 55LD6 32 42 47LD7 32 37 42LD8 jack HDMI DVI IN on the TV O Turn on the external equipment Refer to the external equipment s manual for operating instructions Select HDMI1 HDMI2 HDMI3 or HDMI4 Except for 32 37 42LD4 32 37 42 47 55LD6 32 42 471 LD 7 32 37 42LD8 input source using the INPUT button on the remote control HDMI DTV OUTPUT NOTE gt The TV can receive video and audio signals simultaneously when using an HDMI cable gt If the DVD does not support Auto HDMI you must set the output resolution appropriately gt Check that your HDMI cable is High Speed HDMI Cable If the HDMI cables are not High Speed
12. Selects a programme Move from one full set of screen information to the next one Controls SIMPLINK or MY MEDIA menu Photo List Music List and Movie List Installing Batteries m Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install the batteries matching correct polarity with with m Install two 1 5 V AAA batteries Do not mix old or used batter ies with new ones m Close cover m To remove the batteries perform the installation actions in reverse PLASMA TV MODELS 50 60PK5 50 60PK7 50 60PK9 90 60PX9 ACCESSORIES Ensure that the following accessories are included with your TV If an accessory is missing please contact the dealer where you purchased the TV m Image shown may differ from your TV yp _ N wy Nero MediaHome Power Cord 4 Essentials CD 781 EON NOILVdVvdsdd 7 Owner s Manual Z S opLE aaa 2 Protection Cover 3D Glasses Only 50 60PX9 Owner s Manual Except for 50 60PK9 Only 50 60PK9 90 60PX9 90 60PX9 Remote Control Batteries AAA Wireless LAN for Broadband Ce DLNA Adaptor SS Only 50 60PK950 lt p 50 60PK950N 50 60PK980 Cae ardor a 50 60PK990 50 60PX950N ae 50 60PX980 50 60PX990 Management
13. Touch Button You can use the desired button function by touching O POWER INPUT MENU OK VOLUME PROGRAMME NOILVdaVvdsdd 7 A 47 NOILVdaVvdsdd E A 48 PREPARATION m Image shown may differ from your TV BACK PANEL INFORMATION 5 RGB IN CPC AS 242G IN mM OONTROL amp SERVICE Power Cord Socket This TV operates on an AC power Never attempt to operate the TV on DC power LAN Network connection for AccuWeather Picasa YouTube etc Also used for video photo and music files on a local network WIRELESS Control Connect the Wireless Ready Dongle to the TV to control the external input devices con nected to Wireless Media Box wirelessly RGB DVI Audio Input Connect the audio from a PC or DTV OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT Connect digital audio to various types of equipment Connect to a Digital Audio Component Use an Optical audio cable Euro Scart Socket AV1 Connect scart socket input or output from an external device to these jacks oe USE IM FPCMCIA CARD SLOT Wibeo Maau HOMIIN 4 i a k i nN 3 i Component Input Connect a component video audio device to these jacks HDMI DVI IN Input Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN Or DVI VIDEO signal to HDMI DVI port with DVI to HDMI cable RGB IN Input Connect the output from a PC RS 232C IN CONTROL amp SERVICE PORT Connect to the RS 232C port
14. 32 37 42 47 55LD68 32 42 47LD78 32 37 42LD88 ENERGY AVMODE INPUT D O 0 to 9 number Selects a programme bs button Selects numbered items in a menu Space Opens an empty space on the screen keyboard LIST Displays the programme table gt p 55 Q VIEW Returns to the previously viewed programme en roa 2 MUTE NOILVaVvdsdd 7 np Coloured These buttons are used for teletext on TELETEXT buttons models only Programme edit SIMPLINK See a list of AV devices connected to TV When you toggle this ee the Simplink menu appears at the screen gt p 62 CD CD Es Direct access to your internet portal of entertainment and news services developed by Orange Only France E TELETEXT These buttons are used for teletext BUTTONS For further details see the Teletext section gt p 177 SUBTITLE Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode A 25 NOILVdaVvdsdd E PREPARATION ENERGY AVMODE INPUT 0066 SAVING L FAY 2 MUTE v d a nbr y VOLUME UP Adjusts the volume DOWN MARK Select the input to apply the Picture Wizard settings Check and un check programmes in the USB menu FAV Displays the selected favourite programme CHAR NUM Shifts the Character or Number for NetCast menu RATIO Selects your desired Aspect Ratio of picture gt p 135 DELETE Deletes the entered char
15. 32 37 42 47 55LE75 32 37 42 47LE75 Only 42 47 55LE8 Only 32LE4 32 37 42 47 55LE78 32 37 42 47LE78 32 37 42 47 55LE79 F 42 47LX6 32 37 42 47LE79 42 47LX6 Only 55LE5 55LE75 55LE78 55LE79 Only 32 37 42LE4 NOILVaVvdsdd 7 Only Only 42 47 55LE8 A 5 PREPARATION ATTACHING THE TV TOA BACK COVER FOR DESK WIRE ARRANGEMENT Only 32LE4 32LE5 m Image shown may differ from your TV m Image shown may differ from your TV The TV must be attached to desk so it cannot be a pag ey eeii CADIE pulled in a forward backward direction potentially l causing injury or damaging the product Use only It will help prevent the power cable from an attached screw being removed by accident NOILVdaVvdsdd E Cable Holder After connecting the cables as necessary install Cable Holder as shown and bundle the cables WARNING iis Holder gt To prevent TV from falling over the TV should be securely attached to the floor wall per installation instructions Tipping shaking or rocking the machine may cause injury SWIVEL STAND m Image shown may differ from your TV _ After installing the TV you can adjust the TV set manually to the left or right direction by 20 _ degrees to suit your viewing position A 6 KENSINGTON SECURITY SYSTEM m This feature is not available for all models m Image sh
16. 32 37 42 47 55LE75 32 37 42 47 55LE78 32 37 42 47 55LE79 42 4 7ISSLEB 42 4 7LXO HF eee A 1 LCD TV Models 32 37 42LD4 32 37 42 47 55LD6 32 42 47LD7 392 37 42 D8 os ccccecensescsecesseessesseseeess A 15 LED LCD TV Models 47 55LX9 A 27 LED LCD TV Models 42 47LE73 A 36 PLASMA TV Models 50 60PK5 50 60PK7 5O 6OPK9 50 60PXQ lien A 45 EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP Antenna Connection cccccccceeeeceeeeeeeeteneereees 1 Connecting with a Component cable 2 Connecting with an HDMI cable 0 3 Connecting with an HDMI to DVI cable 4 Connecting with a Euro Scart cable 5 Bo SEUD eee eee een me ae ree ere eerste nee eee eee 6 Connecting with AN RF Cable cee 6 Connecting with AN RCA cable 00ee T Connecting with a D sub 15 pin cable 8 Insertion of A CI MOdUle ccccseeeeeeeeeeeeerees 9 Headphone Setup tris wtjesctstemancerwcenenewenesteedccmuane 9 Digital audio out SetUP cee ceeececeeeeeee ees 10 External Equipment Wireless Connection 11 Supported Display Resolution c08 12 Screen Setup for PC MOdGE eeceeeeeee ees 15 Network setup ccccccccesccceeeeeeeeseseeeaeessaeesees 19 WATCHING TV PROGRAMME CONTROL MEGAMI onthe TY sieni 29 Initializing Setup srren ii 29 Programme SCIOCHON sea ic
17. Balance LII R d Previous Select Sound Mode Auto Volume Clear Voice Il or Balance Make appropriate adjustments Refer to p 154 to 158 AJDIAAG Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL i m When you select the Set 3D video Only 42 47LX6 47 55LX9 50 60PX9 q Puton 3D glasses See Sit 2 meters from TV to enjoy the best 3D view To select more comfortable view for you change to left right image of fa Power on your 3D glasses and put them on za Power on your 3D glasses and put them on glasses with ij button Sit 2 meters from TV to enjoy the best 3D Sit 2 meters from TV to enjoy the best 3D View view E Setting Left Right E 3D effect setting 10 EEEE E Left Right image change C4 End 3D video For more information see the 3D Imaging section in the Owner s Manual 106 PHOTO LIST You can view photo files on USB or PC storage device The On Screen Display may be different from your TV Images are an example to assist with the TV operation When you are watching the photo by the Photo List function you can not change the picture mode PHOTO JPEG supporting file Baseline 64 x 64 to 15360 x 8640 Progressive 64 x 64 to 1920 x 1440 e You can play JPEG files only e Non supported files are displayed in the form of predefined icon e An error message occurs for corrupted files or file formats that cannot be played e Corrupted image files may not be displayed properly e It m
18. O Intelligent Sensor Y Standard Except for 42 47 55LE8 Select Intelligent Sensor Except for 32 37 42LD4 Vivid Standard Cinema Except for 42 47 55LE8 IHX Cinema Only 42 47 55LE8 IHX Bright Room Only Select PICTURE Select Picture Mode L PICTURE amp T se e Aspect Ratio 16 9 EJ e Picture Wizard Inc e eq Energy Saving Intelligent Se e Picture Mode 70 m Ta 100 CE 50 EE E Standard u Apg S O g Expert1 O wm Expert2 e Contrast e Brightness e Sharpness O Intelligent Sensor v Standard only 42 47 55LE8 Select PICTURE Select Picture Mode Select Vivid Standard APS LO IHX Cinema X Bright J Room Sport or Game 42 47 55LE8 Sport or Game e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen TOYLNOO 3HNL ld E 139 JOYLNOO 3HNL ld i 140 PICTURE CONTROL e Picture Mode adjusts the TV for the best picture appearance Select the preset value in the Picture Mode menu based on the programme category e When the Intelligent sensor function is on the most suitable picture is automatically adjusted according to the surrounding conditions Except for 32 37 42LD4 e You can also adjust Picture Mode in the Q Menu Intelligent Sensor Adjusts picture according to the s
19. Page 1 1 003 B03 mp3 004 B04 mp3 00 00 00 00 OOE a EEA MARK VEU Exit Mark Mode Exit e When one or more music files are marked the marked music title will be played in sequence For example if you want to listen to only one music repeatedly just mark the music only and play it If no music is marked all the music in the folder will be played in sequence e If you want to activate Random playback you must set Option gt Set audio play gt Random to On AVIAAG Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL p 119 AJDIAAG Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL i 120 TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE Using the remote control Display the selected music file Return to normal TV viewing Using the Music List function play Je Music List 3 file s Marked USB1 External Drive Choose options HMM 005 B05 mp3 006 B06 mp3 007 BO7 mp3 008 B08 mp3 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 lt i gt 005 B05 mp3 gt 02 90 03 25 e Show the Option menu Sa P Select Set Audio Play or Set Audio NOTE gt Option values changed in Movie List does not affect Photo List and Music List gt Option value changed in Photo List and Music List are changed likewise in Photo List and Music List excluding Movie List gt You can listen to the music only within the device currently played AVIAAG Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL p 121 TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE Using the remote control Stop the playing music file When you press the P
20. ail e Aspect Ratio e Picture Wizard e Picture Mode i O e e Energy Saving 16 9 Intelligent Se E Standard __ At J e Contrast Brightness e Sharpness Select PICTURE Select Picture Mode Select Vivid Standard Sport or Game Select Contrast Brightness Sharpness Colour Tint or Colour Temp Make appropriate adjustments e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen TOYLNOO 3HNL ld E 141 JOYLNOO 3HNL ld i 142 PICTURE CONTROL e Benefits of using Backlight LCD TV LED LCD TV only The electricity consumption is reduced by up to 60 The black brightness is reduced As the black has greater depth you can enjoy a better quality definition You can adjust brightness with maintaining original signal resolution NOTE gt You cannot adjust colour sharpness and tint in the RGB PC HDMI PC mode gt When the Expert 1 2 is selected you can select Backlight Contrast Brightness H Sharpness V Sharpness Colour or Tint PICTURE IMPROVEMENT TECHNOLOGY You can calibrate the screen for each Picture Mode or set the video value according to the special video screen You can set the video value differently for each input To reset to the factory default screen after making adjustments to each video mode execute the Picture Reset function for each Picture Mode Im
21. gt To adjust bass You can also adjust bass in the AUDIO menu Transmission K s Set ID Data Cr Data Min 00 to Max 64 x Refer to Real data mapping 1 See page 207 Ack s Set ID OK NG Data x 15 Balance Command k t gt To adjust balance You can also adjust balance in the AUDIO menu Transmission k t Set ID Data Cr Data Min 00 to Max 64 Refer to Real data mapping 1 See page 207 Ack iti Set ID OK NG Data x 16 Colour Temperature Command x u gt To adjust colour temperature You can also adjust Colour Temperature in the PICTURE menu Transmission x ul Set ID Data Cr Data Min 00 to Max 64 Refer to Real data mapping 1 See page 207 Ack u Set ID OK NG Datal x 17 ISM Method Command j p Plasma TV only gt To control the ISM method You can also adjust ISM Method in OPTION menu Transmission Dipli I Set ID Data Cr Data 02 Orbiter 04 White wash 08 Normal 20 Colour Wash Ack p I Set ID OK NG Data x 18 Energy Saving Command j q gt To reduce the power consumption of the TV You can also adjust Energy Saving in PICTURE menu Transmission la l Set ID Data Cr Power Saving Function LCD TV LED LCD TV only ofofo toron o 1 o 7 screen or Intelligent Sensor Low Power 1 Plasma TV only Ack la i Set ID OK NG Data x 19 Auto Config
22. STIM2IATLETS STI4QITLETE 200 200 M6 4 formed by a qualified professional installer STARA TES s s 55LET 400 400 M6 4 42 47LE8 200 200 M6 4 55LE8 400 400 M6 4 42 47LX6 200 200 M6 4 REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS Only 32 37 42LE4 32 37 42 47 55LE5 32 37 42 47 55LE75 32 37 42 47 55LE78 32 37 42 47 55LE79 42 47 55LE8 When using the remote control aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV ENERGY AVMODE INPUT ove ENERGY AVMODE INPUT 0686 SAVING aa IN loans Le MUTE MENU Q MENU BACK EXIT c C CD CO C9 E v d kapg EDED D CE GD Eo OS Gs nop TT y POWER LIGHT ENERGY SAVING AV MODE INPUT TV RAD NetCast THUMBSTICK Up Down Left Right OK GUIDE Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby You can turn the light of the remote control button on or off NOILVaVvdsdd 7 Adjust the Energy Saving mode of the TV gt p 138 It helps you select and set images and sounds when connecting AV devices gt p 66 External input mode rotate in regular sequence gt p 57 Selects Radio TV and DIV programme Selects a menu Clears all on screen displays and returns to TV viewing from any menu gt p 31 Select the desired NetCast menu source gt p 68 AccuWeather Picasa YouTube and etc NetCast menu source can differ by country Select the desired quick menu so
23. You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or your school if any to sign a copyright disclaimer for the program if necessary Here is a sample alter the names Yoyodyne Inc hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program Gnomovision which makes passes at compil ers written by James Hacker lt signature of Ty Coon gt 1 April 1989 Ty Coon President of Vice This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs If your program is a subroutine library you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library If this is what you want to do use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License XIGNAddV i 21 A GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 1 February 1999 Copyright C 1991 1999 Free Software Foundation Inc 51 Franklin Street Fifth Floor Boston MA 02110 1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License version 2 hence the version number 2 1 Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the
24. control buttons Installing Batteries m Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install the batteries matching correct polarity with with m Install two 1 5 V AAA batteries Do not mix old or used batter ies with new ones m Close cover m To remove the batteries perform the installation actions in L reverse A 55 NOILVdaVvdsdd E A 560 PREPARATION REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS only 50 60Px9 When using the remote control aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV LIGHT ENERGY AVMODE INPUT g 0 08G SAVING e Fav Ba Ca CD ex W d BACK EXIT g UR SELECT GOL Oot DOS nob y POWER LIGHT ENERGY SAVING AV MODE INPUT TV RAD NetCast THUMBSTICK Up Down Left Right OK GUIDE Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby You can turn the light of the remote control button on or off Adjust the Energy Saving mode of the TV gt p 138 It helps you select and set images and sounds when connecting AV devices gt p 66 External input mode rotate in regular sequence gt p 57 Selects Radio TV and DTV programme Selects a menu Clears all on screen displays and returns to TV viewing from any menu p 31 Select the desired NetCast menu source gt p 68 AccuWeather Picasa YouTube and etc NetCast menu source can differ by country Select the desired quick menu source
25. e Country UK e Disability Assistance e Power Indicator e Factory Reset e Mode Setting e IR Blaster Adjust Set ID to choose the desired TV ID number The adjustment range of SET ID is 1 to 99 N XIGNAddV 7 03 APPENDIX Communication Parameters Baud rate 9600 bps UART Data length 8 bits Parity None Stop bit 1 bit Communication code ASCII code m Use a crossed reverse cable Transmission Receiving Protocol Transmission Command1 Command2 Set ID Data Cr Command 1 First command to control the TV j k m or x Command 2 Second command to control the TV Command Reference List COMMAND COMMAND DATA 1 2 Hexadecimal XIGNAddV i A 01 Power k a 00 to 01 Set ID You can adjust the set ID to choose desired monitor ID number in option 2 R k Refer to p 205 AA j TAME menu Adjustment range is 1 to 99 03 Screen Mute k d Refer to p 205 When selecting Set ID 0 every con 04 Volume Mute k e 00 to 01 nected set is controlled 05 Volume Control k f 00 to 64 Set ID is indicated as decimal 1 to 99 66 Conad k g 00 to 64 on menu and as Hexa decimal 0x0 to 0x63 on transmission receiving proto 07 Brightness k h 00 to 64 col 08 Colour k i 00 to 64 DATA To transmit command data 09 Tint k j 00 to 64 Transmit FF data to read status of com 10 Sharpness k k 00 to 64 io plas a Cr Carriage Return 11 OSD Select k 00 to 01
26. AS bd Nero MediaHome Cable Holder Owner s Manual 4 Essentials CD Owner s Manual Batteries Remote Control A Cable Management Clip This item is not included for all models Lightly wipe any stains or C gt fingerprints on the surface of the TV with the polish ing cloth Polishing Clot Do not e exce ave Component gender cable Polishing cloth for force This may cause AV gender cable use on the screen scratching or discoloura tion M4 x 20 M4 x 12 Bolts for stand assembly Use of ferrite core This feature is not available for all models Ferrite core can be used to reduce the via te electromagnetic wave when connecting PAW P the PONS cord ee ai The closer the location of the ferrite core Ferrite Core to the power plug the better it is Install the power plug closely This item is not included for all models FRONT PANEL CONTROLS NOTE gt TV can be placed in standby mode in order to reduce the power consumption And TV should be switched off using the power switch on the TV if it will not be watched for some time as this will reduce energy consumption The energy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the level of brightness of the picture is reduced and this will reduce the overall running cost CAUTION gt Do not step on the glass stand or subject it to any impact It may break causing possible injury from frag ments of g
27. Aspect Ratio Clear Voice II Picture Mode Sound Mode Audio or Audio Language Sleep Timer Skip Off On USB Device p 30 Allows you to navigate the on screen menus and adjust the system settings to your preference Accepts your selection or displays the current mode Allows the user to move return one step in an inter active application EPG or other user interaction function Clears all on screen displays and returns to TV viewing from any menu Shows programme guide gt p 129 INFO Shows the present screen information AD Switches the Audio Description On or Off APP Select the MHP TV menu source Only Italy Only 50 60PX98 LIGHT ENERGY AVMODE INPUT 0680 SAVING 1 3 O to 9 number Selects a programme button Selects numbered items in a menu Space Opens an empty space on the screen keyboard LIST Displays the programme table p 55 o Q VIEW Returns to the previously viewed programme MARK FAV NOILVaVvdsdd 7 Eza Coloured These buttons are used for teletext on TELETEXT buttons models only Programme edit L R SELECT Use this to view 3D video gt p 89 FREEZE Pause the present picture at the screen It doesn t work at USB Mode and Simplink The TV returns to normal viewing automatically if no signal is received or no operation is performed for 5 minutes If you keep the screen in Freeze condition the residual image can exist
28. HORIZONTAL INSTALLATION a We recommend the use of a LG Brand wall aan a 4 a ee EON mounting bracket when mounting the TV to a wal AAA e eee m We recommend that you purchase a wall mount SOPK 7s 400 400 M6 4 ing bracket which supports VESA standard GOPK 600 400 M8 AA m LG recommends that wall mounting be per oOPK9 400 400 Mo o P formed by a qualified professional installer 60PK9 600 400 M8 i oOPX9 400 400 M6 6OPXQ 600 400 M8 4 A 52 REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS Only 50 60PK5 50 60PK7 50 60PK9 When using the remote control aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV ENERGY AVMODE INPUT vd POWER Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby ac an LIGHT LIGHT You can turn the light of the remote control button aS on or off 0 ENERGY AVMODE INPUT Vea 3 O CA ENERGY Adjust the Energy Saving mode of the TV gt p 138 O SAVING SAVING AV MODE It helps you select and set images and sounds when connecting AV devices gt p 66 INPUT External input mode rotate in regular sequence wis gt p 57 TV RAD Selects Radio TV and DTV programme MARK FAV CHARINUM AN Selects a menu G Clears all on screen displays and returns to TV beets N viewing from any menu gt p 31 NetCast Select the desired NetCast menu source p 68 AccuWeather Picasa YouTube and etc NetCast menu source can differ by country Select the des
29. Institute of Radio Engineers is the unit to display the size of the video sig nal and can be set among 10 20 30 to 100 LCD TV LED LCD TV 5 10 15 to 100 Plasma TV You can adjust Red Green or Blue according to each setting e Luminance This function displays calculated luminance value for 2 2 gamma You can input luminance value you want at 100 IRE than the target luminance value for 2 2 gamma is displayed at every 10 steps from 10 IRE to 90 IRE LCD TV LED LCD TV e Red Green Blue The adjustment range is 50 to 50 m As the tool used by the experts to make adjustments by using the test pat terns this does not affect other colours but can be used to selectively adjust the 6 colour areas Red Green Blue Cyan Magenta Yellow Colour difference may not be distinctive even when you make the adjust ments for the general video m Adjusts Red Green Blue Yellow Cyan Magenta e Red Green Blue Yellow Cyan Magenta Colour The adjustment range is 30 to 30 e Red Green Blue Yellow Cyan Magenta Tint The adjustment JOYLNOO 3HNL ld 5 Colour Management System oo range is 30 to 30 146 m This feature is disable in RGB PC and HDMI PC mode PICTURE RESET Settings of the selected picture modes return to the default factory settings 4 Viidi pico e Colour 60 M e Tint 0 Rume e Colour Temp O Emmm i L PICTURE amp 2 e Advanced Control e Picture Reset e TruMotion Off e Screen S
30. Power requirement Power Consumption W B HRS Dimensions Width x Height x Depth with stand without stand with stand Weight without stand Power requirement Power Consumption CI Module Size Width x Height x Depth Operating Temperature Environment condition Operating Humidity Storage Temperature Storage Humidity Supported movie files 32LD750 ZA 32LD750N ZA 32LD780 ZA 32LD790 ZA 804 0 mm x 567 0 mm x 212 0 mm 804 0 mm x 510 0 mm x 73 8 mm 10 2 kg 8 8 kg AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 150 W 42LD750 ZA 42LD750N ZA 42LD780 ZA 42LD790 ZA 1032 0 mm x 700 0 mm x 260 0 mm 32LD751 ZB 32LD751N ZB 32LD781 ZB 32LD791 ZB 32LD752 ZD 804 0 mm x 567 0 mm x 212 0 mm 804 0 mm x 510 0 mm x 73 8 mm 10 2 kg 8 8 kg AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 150 W 42LD751 ZB 42LD751N ZB 42LD781 ZB 42LD791 ZB 42LD752 ZD 1032 0 mm x 700 0 mm x 260 0 mm 0 C to 40 C Less than 80 20 C to 60 C Less than 85 Refer to p 96 to 97 m The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement XIGNAddV 7 195 APPENDIX 47LD7 47LD750 ZA 47LD750N ZA 47LD751 ZB 47LD751N ZB 47LD780 ZA 47LD790 ZA 47LD781 ZB 47LD791 ZB 47LD752 ZD WO DH RS Dimensions Width x Height x Depth with stand 1144 0 mm x 764 0 mm x 260 0 mm 1144 0 mm x 764 0 mm x 260 0 mm without stand 1144 0 mm x 704 0 mm x 76 8 mm 1144 0 mm x 704 0 mm
31. Side by Side Checker Boar HDMI V 1 4 with 3D Frame Packing Top amp Bottom Side by Side Checker Boar Top amp Bottom Side by Side Checker Board MPO Photo Top amp Bottom Side by Side Playable 3D video format Top amp Bottom Side by Side For 3D video feed that is input in the HDMI V 1 4 with 3D Frame Packing format it is automatically switched to 3D Media contents and a player need to support HDMI V 1 4 with 3D Frame Packing to play in 3D Video which is input as HDMI V 1 4 with 3D Frame Packing format is switched into the 3D screen automatically After selecting the shape as shown in the screen on TV wear the 3D glasses lt gt Move OK Select 3D video or 2D video After selecting the shape as shown in the screen on TV wear the 3D glasses lt gt Move OK Changed from 2D imaging to 3D imaging To turn on 3D Mode select this icon i bn r por ta See ranh Top amp Bottom Side by Side Frame Sequential E _ be ako LE Exit bt Checker Board Eja To turn on 3D Mode select this thumbnail Top amp Bottom Side by Side Checker Boar ES k i or Select Setting Left Right or Left Right image change 3 Puton 3D glasses Sex Sit 2 meters from TV to enjoy the best 3D view zj Power on your 3D glasses and put them on Sit 2 meters from TV to enjoy the best 3D Power on your 3D glasses and put them on Sit 2 meters from
32. Socket gt RF Coaxial Wire 75 Q Outdoor Antenna VHF UHF Single family Dwellings Houses Connect to wall jack for outdoor antenna VHF m In poor signal areas to achieve better picture quality it may be necessary to install a signal amplifier to the antenna as shown above m f signal needs to be split for two TVs use an antenna signal splitter for connection dNLAS LNAWdINOA WNYsALXS f dNLAS LNAWdINOA WNdYsALXS i EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP m To avoid damaging any equipment never plug in any power cord until you have finished connecting all equipment E ae seas on EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP mainly uses diagrams for the 32 37 42 47 55LE7 models m Image shown may differ from your TV CONNECTING WITH A COMPONENT CABLE This TV can receive Digital RF Cable signals without an external digital set top box However if you do receive Digital signals from a digital set top box or other digital external device refer to the diagram as shown below D Connect the video outputs Y PB PR of the external equipment digital set top box DVD etc to the COMPONENT IN VIDEO jacks on the TV Connect the audio output of the external equip ment digital set top box DVD etc to the COMPONENT IN AUDIO jacks on the TV Turn on the external equipment Refer to the external equipment s manual for operating instructions Select the Component input source using the INPUT button on the remote control
33. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of this License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 10 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally XIGNAddV 7 N 13 APPENDIX NO WARRANTY 11 BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
34. Xvid 1 10 beta2 JPEG VC1 Sorenson H 263 H 264 gt The DRM tp trp file in DLNA server is not played when Movie List is in operation DEACTIVATION The purpose of deactivation is to allow deactivation of devices for users who have activated all the available devices through the web_ server and are blocked from activating more devices DivX VOD allowed the consumer to activate up to 6 devices under one account but to replace or deactivate any of those devices the consumer had to contact DivX Support and request deletion Now with this added feature consumers will be able to deactivate the device themselves and hence better manage their DivX VOD devices MY MEDIA Movie List Music List A i C j Select MY MEDIA enc see Deactivation Select Yes Display Deactivation DivX Reg Code J Previous Q Deregistration code Deregister at http vod divx com Continue with registration Yes No e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen J9IlA3d d YO 4SN Y ASN OL p 127 GAME GAME Allows you to enjoy the games installed on the TV ry JUMP HOLE IN ONE JOKING BURGER pian OPTION NETWORK BLUETOOTH MY MEDIA SAVING CRYSTAL INVADER URGENT SURVIVAL fa Press OK to set programme settings in ra Customer Support HEE Simple Manual Fe Exit Select GAME Selec
35. Zoom The following selection will allow you to view a picture The following selection will allow you to view with an original 4 3 aspect ratio the picture without any alteration while filling the entire screen However the top and bottom of the picture will be cropped e 14 9 You can view a picture format of 14 9 or a general TV programme in the 14 9 mode The 14 9 screen is viewed in the same way as in 4 3 but is moved to the up and down e Cinema Zoom Choose Cinema Zoom when you want to enlarge the picture in correct proportion Note When enlarging or reducing the picture the image may become distorted lt or gt button Adjust enlarge proportion of Cinema Zoom The adjustment range is 1 to 16 Vv or A button Move the screen NOTE gt You can only select 4 3 16 9 Wide 14 9 Zoom Cinema Zoom in Component mode gt You can only select 4 3 Original 16 9 Wide 14 9 Zoom Cinema Zoom in HDMI mode gt You can only select 4 3 16 9 Wide in RGB PC HDMI PC mode only gt In DIV HDMI Component over 720p mode Just Scan is available gt In Analogue DTV AV Scart mode Full Wide is available PICTURE WIZARD This feature lets you adjust the picture quality of the original image Use this to calibrate the screen quality by adjusting the Black and White Level etc General users can calibrate the screen quality by easily following each stage When you adjust the image to Low Recommended or High
36. is switched on gt If you select the wrong local country teletext may not appear correctly on the screen and some problems may occur during teletext operation gt The Cl Common Interface function may not be applied based on country broadcasting circumstances gt DTV mode control buttons may not function based on country broadcasting circumstances gt In country that Digital broadcasting regulation isn t fixed some DTV function may not work depending on digital broadcasting circumstances gt The Country Setting UK should only be activated in UK gt If the country Soule is set to European terrestrial digital standard broadcasting programmes are avail able but some DTV functions may not work properly LANGUAGE SELECTION The Audio function allows selection of a preferred language If audio data in a selected language is not broadcast the default language audio will be played Use the Subtitle function when two or more subtitle languages are broadcast If subtitle data in a selected language is not broadcast the default language subtitle will be displayed When the languages you selected as the primary for Audio Language and Subtitle Language and Text Language are not supported you can select language in secondary category In Digital mode use the Text language function when two or more Text languages are broadcast If teletext data in a selected language is not broadcast the default Text language page will be
37. software is free for all its users This license the Lesser General Public License applies to some specially designated software packages typically libraries of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it You can use it too but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case based on the explanations below When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom of use not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs and that you are informed that you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of the library whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code If you link other code with the library you must provide complete object files to the recipients so that they
38. you can adjust an image by Energy Saving and AV Mode key on the remote control User setup for each image mode does not operate e Trick Mode does not support other functions than gt if video files do not have index information e When playing video file using network the Trick mode is limited to 2 times speed e Video file names that contain special characters may not be playable Supported DivX file File Extensions asf wmv divx avi mp4 m4v mkv ts trp tp vob NPQ A V Profile Level Support Explanation Advanced Profile Level 3 VC 1 Advanced Profil vanced FTO eg 720p60 1080i60 1080p30 Only streams compliant E E E E E E EE EE E E T E T E A E ES to SMPTE 421M VC 1 Video VC 1 Simple and Main Simple Profile Medium Level e g CIF QVGA Profiles Main Profile High Level e g 1080p30 820929 are supported l WMA Standard Audio DivX3 11 DivX4 Global motion com pensation or quar terpel motion esti mation does not supported Streams using this syntax are not supported Advanced Simple Profile e g 720p 1080i Main Profile Level 4 1 High Profile Level 4 1 e g 720p60 1080i60 1080p30 H 264 AVC MPEG 1Layer I Il MPEG 1 Layer III MP3 Dolby Digital Global motion compensation or quarterpel motion estimation does not supported Streams using this syntax are not sup ported Most of the MKV content available is Main Profile Level 4
39. 1255 8 mm x 805 0 mm x 255 0 mm Width x Height x Depth without stand 1085 9 mm x 654 2 mm x 31 6 mm 1255 8 mm x 749 6 mm x 31 6 mm with stand 26 7 kg 32 7 kg without stand 22 1 kg 28 1 kg Power requirement AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz Power Consumption 210 W 260 W CI Module Size Width x Height x Depth Weight 100 0 mm x 55 0 mm x 5 0 mm Operating 0 C to 40 C Temperature pn Less than 80 Environment condition Operating Humidity j Storage Temperature 20 C to 60 C Storage Humidity Less than 85 Supported movie files Refer to p 96 to 97 m The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement XIGNAddV 7 189 XIGNAddV i 190 APPENDIX WO B HRS Dimensions Width x Height x Depth with stand without stand with stand Weigh ea without stand Power requirement Power Consumption WO D HRS Dimensions Width x Height x Depth with stand without stand with stand Weight ae without stand Power requirement Power Consumption Cl Module Size Width x Height x Depth Operating Temperature Environment condition Operating Humidity Storage Temperature Storage Humidity Supported movie files 42LE8500 ZA 42LE850N ZA 42LE8800 ZA 42LE8900 ZA 1013 3 mm x 705 8 mm x 235 5 mm 1013 3 mm x 645 8 mm x 34 5 mm 27 2 kg 23 1 kg AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 160 W 47LE8500 ZA 47LE850N ZA 47LE
40. 180 or 240 min e When you switch the TV off the preset sleep timer is cancelled e You can also adjust Sleep Timer in the TIME menu ONILLAS AWIL 7 171 SONILVG JOYLNOOD WLNSAdVd 172 PARENTAL CONTROL RATINGS SET PASSWORD amp LOCK SYSTEM Enter the password press 0 0 0 0 on the remote control handset When France is selected for Country password is not 0 0 0 O but 1 2 3 8 When France is selected for Country password cannot be set as 0 0 0 0 If a channel is locked enter the password to unlock it temporarily Lock ms a e Set Password oi e Lock System Off e Block Programme e Parental Guidance Blocking Off e Input Block e Key Lock Off i 4 fi i ee Select LOCK oe Select Lock System OS L sete On e Set the password Input a 4 digit password Be sure to remember this number Re enter new password for confirm Lock A e Set Password e Lock System Off e Block Programme On e Parental Guidance Blocking Off e Input Block e Key Lock Off e If you forget your password press 0 3 2 5 on the remote control handset e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen BLOCK PROGRAMME Blocks any programme that you do not want to watch or that you do not want you
41. 32 37 42LD4 LG TVs with a Wireless Control port support the LG Wireless Media Box which is sold separately When you connect the Wireless Ready Dongle included with the Wireless Media Box to the TV external devices can be connected to the LG Wireless Media Box and video and audio will be sent to the TV wirelessly After the wireless is connected press the INPUT button to view the wireless input screen Refer to the Wireless Media Box manual for operating instructions Connect the WIRELESS CONTROL jack of the Wireless Ready Dongle to the WIRELESS CONTROL jack on the TV o Connect HDMI OUT jack of the Wireless Ready Dongle to the HDMI DVI IN 1 DVI HDMI DVI IN 2 HDMI DVI IN 3 or HDMI IN 4 Except for 32 37 42LD4 32 37 42 47 55LD6 32 42 47LD7 32 37 42LD8 jack on the TV LG Wireless Media Box NOTE gt WIRELESS CONTROL Wireless Ready Dongle power supply and control usage gt HDMI Video Audio signal is connected in Wireless Ready Dongle gt When you connect to the Wireless Media Box Separately sold product you can watch the external device connected to the Wireless Media Box through wireless connection gt When using the external device connected to the Wireless Media Box some functions of the TV menu may not work gt In wireless external output Real Cinema and Digital Noise Reduction functions are not supported dNLAS LNAWdINOA WNYsALXS f 11 dNLAsS LNAWdINOA WNYsAL
42. 37 42LD8 four Only 32 37 42LE4 32 37 42 47 55LE5 32 37 42 47 55LE 42 47 55LE8 42 47LX6 47 55LX9 50 60PK5 50 60PK 50 60PK9 50 60PX9 supported at a time e VCR Only one supported at a time JOYLNOO ANWVESDOdd AL ONIHOLVM N TOYLNOO ANWVESDOdd AL ONIHOLVM E WATCHING TV PROGRAMME CONTROL AV MODE You can select the optimal images and sounds when connecting AV devices to external input Off Disables the AV MODE Cinema or IHX Cinema Optimizes video and audio for watching movies Sport Optimizes video and audio for watching sports events Game Optimizes video and audio for playing games Off gt Cinema or THX Cinema Game Sport e f you select Cinema or IHX Cinema in AV mode Cinema or EX Cinema will be selected both for Picture Mode and Sound Mode in PICTURE menu and AUDIO menu respectively e If you select Off in AV mode the picture and image which you initially set will be selected e When playing a video game using PlayStation or Xbox it is recommended to use the Game mode e When in Game mode functions related to picture quality will be optimized for playing games INITIALIZING RESET TO ORIGINAL FACTORY SETTINGS This function initializes all settings But the settings of EADay and Night of the Picture Mode cannot be initialized It is useful to initialize the product or when you move to other city or country When the Factory Reset is completed you m
43. 8 kg 11 7 kg AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 130 W 37LE7500 ZA 37LE750N ZA 37LE7800 ZA 37LE7900 ZA 907 4 mm x 628 3 mm x 269 8 mm 32LE7510 ZB 32LE751N ZB 32LE7810 ZB 32LE7910 ZB 786 4 mm x 556 2 mm x 221 0 mm 786 4 mm x 500 4 mm x 39 9 mm 14 8 kg 11 7 kg AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 130 W 37LE7510 ZB 37LE751N ZB 37LE7810 ZB 37LE7910 ZB 907 4 mm x 628 3 mm x 269 8 mm 0 C to 40 C Less than 80 20 C to 60 C Less than 85 Refer to p 96 to 97 m The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement XIGNAddV 7 187 XIGNAddV i 188 APPENDIX WO DH RS Dimensions Width x Height x Depth with stand without stand with stand igh HEU without stand Power requirement Power Consumption WO DH RS Dimensions Width x Height x Depth with stand without stand with stand i without stand Power requirement Power Consumption CI Module Size Width x Height x Depth Operating Temperature Environment condition Operating Humidity Storage Temperature Storage Humidity Supported movie files 42LE7500 ZA 42LE750N ZA 42LE7800 ZA 42LE7900 ZA 42LE7510 ZB 42LE751N ZB 42LE7810 ZB 42LE7910 ZB 1018 2 mm x 692 5 mm x 269 8 mm 1018 2 mm x 692 5 mm x 269 8 mm 1018 2 mm x 630 7 mm x 29 3mm 1018 2 mm x 630 7 mm x 29 3 mm 23 2 kg 19 1 kg 23 2 kg 19 1 kg AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 150 W AC
44. AP wireless con nections gt Please verify the security settings of AP SSID for wireless AP connection and enquire to the AP supplier for the AP SSID security set tings gt The TV can become slower or malfunction with wrong settings of network equipments wired wireless router hub etc Please install correctly by referring to the manual of the equipment and set the network gt When AP is set to include 802 11 n Except for Russia and if Encryption is designated as WEP 64 128bit or WPA TKIP AES the connection may not be possible There may be different connection methods according to the AP manufacturers Wireless Network Connection The LG Wireless LAN for Broadband DLNA Adaptor allows the TV to connect to a wireless lan network The network configuration and connection method may vary depending on the equipment in use and the network environment Refer to the setup instructions supplied with your access point or wireless router for detailed connection steps and network settings USB IN 2 i K la z ge Y Connect the LG Wireless LAN for Broadband DLNA Adaptor to the USB IN 1 or USB IN 2 jack on the TV o Select Network Setting in the NETWORK menu After connecting you can use the NetCast menu NOTE gt For enjoying pictures music or video stored in the PC using the router the use of wired port in the router is recommended gt When the wireless port of the rou
45. ASCII code OxOD 12 Remote control lock mode k m 00 to 01 ASCII code space 0x20 13 Treble k r 00 to 64 14 B k 00 to 64 ji gt OK Acknowledgement 15 Balance k t 00 to 64 16 Colour Temperature X u 00 to 64 Command2 Set ID OK Data x 17 ISM Method j p Refer to p 207 The set transmits ACK acknowledgement based 18 Energy Saving j q 00 to 05 on this format when receiving normal data At this 19 Auto Configuration j 01 time if the neers as ie Has it indicates 20 Tune Command n 7 Refer to p 207 present status data If the data is data write mode it returns the data of the PC computer 21 Programme Add Skip m b 00 to 01 22 Key m C Key Code Error Acknowledgement 23 Control Back Light m g 00 to 64 Command2 Set ID NG Data x 24 Input select Main X b Refer to p 208 Note During USB operations such as DivX or EMF all commands except Power ka and Key mc are not exe cuted and treated as NG The set transmits ACK acknowledgement based on this format when receiving abnormal data from non viable functions or communication errors Data 00 Illegal Code 01 Power Command k a gt To control Power On Off of the set Transmission kK a Set ID Data Cr Data 00 Power Off 01 Power On Ack a l Set ID OK NG Data x gt To show Power On Off Transmission kK a Set ID FF Cr Ack a l Set ID OK NG Data x Similarly if other
46. BACK button to move to the previous menu screen MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING IN DIGITAL MODE Manual Tuning lets you manually add a programme to your programme list If you want to select the Antenna t k SETUP e Auto Tuning e Auto Tuning UHF CH D e Manual Tuning e Manual Tuning e Programme Edit _ e Programme Edit Feeney en EMO e Booster Off to e Booster e Cl Information wae e Cl Information e Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4 digit password in Lock System On e You can select SBAND when the country is set to Norway Latvia e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen JOYLNOO ANWVESDOdd AL ONIHOLVM 5 39 WATCHING TV PROGRAMME CONTROL If you want to select the Cable SETUP x e Auto Tuning Frequency kHz 362000 e Manual Tuning e Symbol rate kS s 6875 e Programme Edit a e Programme Edit Modulation 64QAM e Booster Off e Booster eCl Information e Cl Information e Cable DTV Setting e Cable DTV Setting e Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4 digit password in Lock System On e Symbol rate Enter a user defined symbol rate Symbol rate Speed at which a device such as modem sends symbols to a channel e Modulation Enter a user defined modulation Modulation Loading of audio or video signals onto carrier e You can not select the Cable DTV
47. BT709 colour area Edge Enhancer m Makes the edge of the picture clearer and distinctive aa hoe T TV a This function can use in Picture Mode Expert LCD TV LED LCD TV Plasma TV On Off 00 This feature is not available for all models xvYCC m This is the function to express richer colour Auto off on m This function is enabled in Picture mode Cinema Expert when xvYCC sig nal is inputted through HDMI Expert Pattern m This is the pattern necessary for checking the picture of Digital TV Off Pattern1 Pattern2 m This function is enabled in Picture Mode Expert when you watch DTV Colour Filter m This is the function to filter the specific colours of the video Off Red Green Blue You can use the RGB filter to set colour saturation and hue accurately eee eee eee Oe ere eee rr errr rer re reer rere errr rer re rere reer rr rer rrr terre rrr rer rer rer rarer rrr ree rer rer rr reece errr rec errr errr rrr reece reer re rrr rr rere reer errr reer ee reer errr ree rere eres re errr rere errr reer errr reer rere reer re cree rere rrr r reer errr reer rere rrr ris This is the function to adjust the overall colour of the screen to the feeling you want a Method 2 Points e Pattern Inner Outer e Red Green Blue Contrast Red Green Blue Brightness The adjustment range is 50 to 50 b e Method 10 point IRE LCD TV LED LCD TV 20 Point IRE Plasma TV Colour Temperature e Pattern Inner Outer Medium Warm Cool e IRE
48. Clip Slightly wipe stained spot on the exterior only with the Only 50 60PK7 cleansing cloths mitt for the product exterior if there is 50 60PK9 stain or fingerprint on surface of the exterior Pe x2 50 60PX9 For cleaning front frame please slowly wipe in one direction after spraying water 1 2 times on cleansing cloths Please remove excessive moisture after cleaning Cable Holder Excessive moisture may cause water stains on the frame This item is not included for all models 3 4 Lightly wipe any stains or fingerprints on the surface of the TV with the polishing M4x28 M5x14 M4x28 M4x14 cloth Only SOPK Only 50PK7 5O0PK9 E Pel Rete cage mugs teeta soos ener ores N A cee 50PX9 B o ler Do not use excessive force Polishing cloth for This ma y cause scratching or Bolts for stand assembly use on the screen discolouration Ferrite core can be used to Ferrite core can be used to reduce the electromagnetic reduce the electromagnetic wave wave when connecting the when connecting the LAN cable power plug Ferrite Core Place the ferrite core far from me COE The closer the location of the This item is not TV and wind the LAN cable in This item is not ferrite core to the power plug included for all the ferrite core once included for all rar Install the power plug closely A 45 PREPARATION FRONT PANEL CONTROLS NOTE gt TV can be placed in standby mode in order to r
49. EXIT Clears all on screen displays and returns to TV viewing from any menu UR SELECT DOE GUIDE Shows programme guide gt p 129 INFO Shows the present screen information D O a AD Switches the Audio Description On or Off C JC APP Select the MHP TV menu source Only Italy _ Only 42 47LX68 A 12 LIGHT eD AVMODE INPUT oS 1 3 O to 9 number Selects a programme button Selects numbered items in a menu Space Opens an empty space on the screen keyboard LIST Displays the programme table p 55 0 Q VIEW Returns to the previously viewed programme Fav Eza NOILVaVvdsdd 7 nb y Coloured These buttons are used for teletext on TELETEXT buttons models only Programme edit L R SELECT Use this to view 3D video gt p 89 SIMPLINK See a list of AV devices connected to TV When you toggle this button the Simplink menu appears at the screen gt p 62 CO Co J er Direct access to your internet portal of entertainment and news services developed by Orange Only France GN TELETEXT These buttons are used for teletext BUTTONS For further details see the Teletext section gt p 177 SUBTITLE Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode A 13 PREPARATION LIGHT ENERGY AVMODE INPUT VOLUME UP Adjusts the volume O DOWN SAVING MARK Select the input to apply the Picture Wizard 1 2a Baer settings Dave
50. Film TV4 Fakta 813 MediaCorp HD5 814 SNY_SSU 816 TVE 1 817 TVE 2 819 CLAN 50 TVE 820 LA7 Demo 24H TVE y Pr Change Favourite Pr Favourite Pr Group d Previous He Page Change Block Unblock E Skip Select a programme to be stored or e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen JOYLNOO ANWVESDOdd AL ONIHOLVM 43 TOYLNOO ANWVESDOdd AL ONIHOLVM E WATCHING TV PROGRAMME CONTROL IN DTV RADIO MODE a Skipping a programme number e When programmes are to be skipped the skipped programme shows in blue and Select a programme number to be skipped these programmes will not be selected by the P buttons during TV viewing r Fas e f 1 r Pj A ON e If you wish to select a skipped programme ORNS Predrag NMInDer te ae directly enter the programme number with 7 the NUMBER buttons or select it in the Release programme edit or EPG Locking a programme number e It can be registered as Lock Select a programme number to be locked programme even when Lock KY System is turned Off Turn the programme number to yellow Release IN TV MODE This function enables you to delete or skip the stored programmes You can also move some channels and use other programme numbers Deleting a programme Select a programme number to be deleted Turn the programme number to red e The s
51. HDMI IN 4 USB device A 10 mm RGB IN Input Connect the output from a PC RS 232C IN CONTROL amp SERVICE PORT Connect to the RS 232C port on a PC This port is used for Service or Hotel mode WIRELESS Control Connect the Wireless Ready Dongle to the TV to control the external input devices con nected to Wireless Media Box wirelessly Audio Video Input Connect audio video output from an external device to these jacks Antenna Input Connect antenna or cable to this jack USB Input Connect USB storage device to this jack PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Association Card Slot a Cl Module to PCMCIA CARD This feature is not available in all countries Headphone Socket Plug the headphone into the headphone socket STAND INSTALLATION m Image shown may differ from your TV When assembling the desk type stand check whether the bolt is fully tightened If not tightened fully the product can tilt forward after the product installation If you tighten the bolt with excessive force the bolt can deviate from abrasion of the tightening part of the bolt Carefully place the TV screen side down on a cushioned surface to protect the screen from damage Assemble the parts of the Stand Body with the Stand Base of the TV At this time tighten the screws that hold the Stand Body on o 2 JS Stand Body Fix the 4 bolts securely u
52. HDMI Cable flickering or no screen display can result Please use the High Speed HDMI Cable dNLAS LNAWdINOA WNYsLXS f dNLAS LNAWdINOA WNYsALXS i EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP CONNECTING WITH AN HDMI TO DVI CABLE D Connect the digital set top box or the DVI out put of the PC to HDMI DVI IN 1 DVI jack on the TV Connect the audio output of the digital set top box or the PC audio output to the AUDIO IN RGB DVI jack on the TV Turn on the digital set top box or the PC and the TV Refer to the digital set top box or the PC manual for operating instructions eC Select HDMI1 input source using the INPUT button on the remote control CONNECTING WITH A EURO SCART CABLE D Connect the Euro scart socket of the external equipment DVD VCR etc to the AV1 Euro scart socket on the TV 2 Turn on the external equipment Refer to the external equipment s manual for operating instructions Select AV1 input source using the INPUT but ton on the remote control O O O AV 1 Analogue TV Digital TV Output Type INE AV1 When DTV scheduled recording is in progress using recording equipment Current input mode TV Out Digital TV Digital TV O Analogue TV AV Analogue TV O Component RGB Analogue TV The input mode is converted to DTV NOTE gt Any Euro scart cable used must be signal shielded RGB AUDIO VIDEO gt TV Out Outputs Analogue TV or Digital TV
53. MUTE button on remote control Transmission k e Set ID Data Cr Data 00 Volume mute on Volume off 01 Volume mute off Volume on Ack ell Set ID OK NG Datal x 05 Volume Control Command k f gt To adjust volume You can also adjust volume with the VOLUME but tons on remote control Transmission K f Set ID Data Cr Data Min 00 to Max 64 Refer to Real data mapping 1 See page 207 Ack fll Set ID OK NG Data x 06 Contrast Command k g gt To adjust screen contrast You can also adjust contrast in the PICTURE menu Transmission Kgl Set ID Data Cr Data Min 00 to Max 64 Refer to Real data mapping 1 See page 207 Ack gl I Set ID OK NG Data x 07 Brightness Command k h gt To adjust screen brightness You can also adjust brightness in the PICTURE menu Transmission k h Set ID Data Cr Data Min 00 to Max 64 Refer to Real data mapping 1 See page 207 Ack h i Set ID OK NG Datal x 08 Colour Command k i gt To adjust the screen colour You can also adjust colour in the PICTURE menu Transmission k Set ID Data Cr Data Min 00 to Max 64 Refer to Real data mapping 1 See page 207 Ack il Set ID OK NG Datal x XIGNAddV 7 N 05 XIGNAddV i APPENDIX 09 Tint Command k j gt To adjust the screen tint You can
54. Numbering Check your antenna connection Start e If you wish to keep on auto tuning select Start using the button Then press the OK button Otherwise select Close e Automatic Numbering Decide whether to use the programme numbers as sent by broadcasting stations for tuning e Skip Scramble Programme Scramble Programme is skipped in Auto Tuning and Manual Tuning e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen Close TOYLNOO JIWWYH9O d AL ONIHOLVM N 35 TOYLNOO ANWVESDOdd AL ONIHOLVM E 36 WATCHING TV PROGRAMME CONTROL m When you select the Full XQ N o eR 28 CO 00 Full Search every available signal Select Full Select OK DO Select Start Run Auto tuning Check your antenna connection The previous channel information will be updated during Auto Tuning E Skip Scramble Programme MZ Automatic Numbering Start Close e If you wish to keep on auto tuning select Start using the v button Then press the OK button Otherwise select Close e Automatic Numbering Decide whether to use the programme numbers as sent by broadcasting stations for tuning e Skip Scramble Programme Scramble Programme is skipped in Auto Tuning and Manual Tuning e You can not select the Full when the service operator is set to Ziggo or Other
55. O Geog err ener a ry aac Eye Care m Adjusts the brightness of the screen automatically to the best level for eyes when the screen is too bright Low High Off m This feature is disable in Picture Mode Vivid Cinema Expertt1 Expert2 Intelligent Sensor Except for 32 37 42LD4 eee eee eee eee ere ere errr rere reer errr ree reer er ree re rrr reer er rer re rrr reer errr errr r rere rrr re sre rrr reer errr eter rere rere ree rer re reer errr reer re reer errr errr reer errr rrr rer reer errr ree rer rer rere rrr seer rer rere r terres terre rrr reer rr rer rere rrr errr Real Cinema LCD TV LED LCD TV only m You can watch a cinema like video by eliminating judder effect Film Mode m Uses this function when you watch film originated movie contents Plasma TV only m This function can work when TruMotion is off On Off 145 PICTURE CONTROL Colour Gamut LCD TV LED LCD TV Advanced Control e Standard Mode to use original colour area regardless of the display char amp Plasma TV acteristics Advanced Control Wide Mode to use maximum colour area of the TV display Expert Control Wide Standard e Standard Mode to use original colour area regardless of the display char Colour Gamut acteristics LCD TV LED LCD TV Wide Mode to use maximum colour area of the TV display E e EBU Mode to display EBU colour area Wide Standard e SMPTE Mode to display SMPTE colour area e BT709 Mode to display
56. Refer to page 201 Ack c Set ID OK NG Data x 23 Control Back Light Command m g LCD TV LED LCD TV only gt To Control the back light Transmission m g Set ID Data Cr Data data Min 00 to Max 64 Ack 9 Set ID OK NG Data x 24 Input select Command x b Main Picture Input gt To select input source for main picture Transmission x b Set ID Data Cr Data Structure MSB LSB L External Input L input Number o o o o o o o ofo nu Ack b Set ID OK NG Data x OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE NOTICE The following GPL executables and LGPL MPL libraries used in this product are subject to the GPL2 0 LGPL2 1 MPL1 1 License Agreements GPL EXECUTABLES Linux kernel 2 6 busybox e2fsprogs jfsutils Izo msdl 1 1 mtd utils ntpclient procps LGPL LIBRARIES Atk cairo directFB ffmpeg glib GnuTLS gtk iconv libintl libgcrypt libgpg error libsoup libusb pango uClibc webkit MPL LIBRARIES Nanox spidermonkey LG Electronics offers to provide source code to you on CD ROM for a charge covering the cost of performing such distribution such as the cost of media shipping and handling upon e mail request to LG Electronics opensource lge com This offer is valid for a period of three 3 years from the date of the distribution of this product by LG Electronics You can obtain a copy of the GPL LGPL MPL licenses on the CD ROM provided w
57. Reset e Set ID 4 e Mode Setting Home Use e IR Blaster Off e Language Language e Country SUK e Disability Assistance e ISM Method e Factory Reset e Set ID e Mode Setting e IR Blaster v Normal E Orbiter E Colour Wash White Wash e Normal i TOYLNOOD 3HNL ld E Select ISM Method Select Normal Orbiter Colour a Wash or White Wash e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen If you do not need this function set Normal Select OPTION 151 JOYLNOO 3HNL ld i 152 PICTURE CONTROL MODE SETTING We recommend setting the TV to Home Use mode for the best picture in your home environment Store Demo mode is an optimal setting for displaying at stores OPTION gt lt OPTION e Language Language e Language Language e Country UK e Country WK e Disability Assistance i e Disability Assistance e Power Indicator j Power Indicator Selecting the environment e Factory Reset be e Factory Reset Choose the setting mode you want e Set ID vd J Set ID Select Home Use to use this TV at home To use e Mode Setting Home Use j e Mode Setting this TV at store select Store Demo e IR Blaster Off e IR Blaster 5 e Demo Mode Off Close Save e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV v
58. SETUP gt The use of a Router may not be allowed or its usage may be limited depending on the poli cies and restrictions of your ISP For details contact your ISP directly gt The wireless network operates at 2 4 GHz radio frequencies that are also used by other household devices such as cordless tele phone Bluetooth devices microwave oven and can be affected by interference from them It can be interrupted by the device using 5 Ghz radio frequencies It is same device with LG wireless media box cordless telephone other Wi Fi device gt It may decrease the service speed using Wireless network by surrounding wireless con dition gt Turn off all unused network equipment in your local home network Some devices may gener ate network traffic gt In some instances placing the access point or wireless router higher up away from the floor may improve the reception gt The reception quality over wireless depends on many factors such as type of the access point distance between the TV and access point and the location of the TV gt When connecting internet through the wired wireless sharing machine it may interrupt the connection because of the use limitation and confirmation of service company gt To connect wireless AP an AP that supports the wireless connection is necessary and the wireless connection function of the AP needs to be activated Please enquire to the AP supplier for the possibility of
59. SIMPLINK See a list of AV devices connected to TV When you toggle this button the Simplink menu appears at the screen p 62 Ce CD er Direct access to your internet portal of entertainment and news services developed by Orange Only France GN TELETEXT These buttons are used for teletext BUTTONS For further details see the Teletext section gt p 177 SUBTITLE Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode A 57 NOILVdVvdsdd E PREPARATION LIGHT ENERGY AVMODE INPUT 2068 SAVING mole she FAV Ea ES G a0 Crm W d UR SELECT VOLUME UP DOWN MARK FAV CHAR NUM 3D mnor TU DELETE MUTE Programme UP DOWN PAGE UP DOWN SIMPLINK MY MEDIA Menu control buttons Adjusts the volume Select the input to apply the Picture Wizard settings Check and un check programmes in the USB menu Displays the selected favourite programme Shifts the Character or Number for NetCast menu Use this to view 3D video gt p 88 Deletes the entered character when entering the character on the screen keyboard Switches the sound on or off Selects a programme Move from one full set of screen information to the next one Controls SIMPLINK or MY MEDIA menu Photo List Music List and Movie List Installing Batteries m Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install the batteries matching correct polarity w
60. Select Standard Music Cinema Sport or Game e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen SOUND SETTING ADJUSTMENT USER MODE 2 AUDIO e Auto Volume 2 Oiii e Clear Voice II Off 3 e Balance 0 e Sound Mode Standard User e Infinite Sound Off e Treble e Bass 50 e Reset Select Treble or Bass am Set the desired sound level auno e Auto Volume Of e Clear Voice II of 3 e Balance M Standard User 2 e Sound Mode Seem Musio S e Infinite Sound e Treble e Bass e Reset e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen INFINITE SOUND Select this option to sound realistic Select AUDIO Ge m Select Infinite Sound F Select On or Off Infinite Sound Infinite Sound is a patented LG proprietary sound processing technology that strives immersive 5 1 surround sound impression with front two loudspeakers e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen JOYLNOOD SADVNONVI 8 ANNOS E 157 TOYULNOO ADVNONVI 8 ANNOS E 158 SOUND amp LANGUAGE CONTROL BALANCE You can adjust the sound balance of the speakers to preferred levels e Auto Volume e Clear Voice Il e Balance o
61. Select a PrograMMe ccccssscccsssseeeeseeeeeees 130 Button Function in NOW NEXT Guide Mode 130 Button Function in 8 Day Guide Mode 131 Button Function in Date Change Mode 132 Button Function in Extended Description Box 132 Button Function in Record Remind Setting Mode 133 Button Function in Schedule List Mode 134 PICTURE CONTROL Picture Size Aspect Ratio Control 135 Picture Wizard schccocssvasgconssenndeeusnnsstiantacegaiesecs 137 Energy Saving sa scsscseseinaeensnesaieicesnordsshentonncasede 138 Preset Picture Settings ccccccsesseeeeeeeees 139 Manual Picture Adjustment cccccseeeeeees 141 Picture Improvement Technology 06 143 Expert Picture Control cccccssccesseeeeeees 144 Picture RESO lick ccancnapususuauansiehsnpasctictiaaentacenavaceent 147 PRU AO TIO A seisin osaan ea 148 LED LOCAL DIMMING ccceeeceeeeeeeeeees 149 Power Indicator ie cesssccesed csastasiesaesasatonstdsedesteses 150 Image Sticking Minimization ISM Method 151 Mode Setting ecesna 152 Demo Mode aanaannannnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnrrnnrn 153 SOUND amp LANGUAGE CONTROL Auto Volume Leveler ccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeees 154 Clear Voice ircscttescncnnstontertaneonimmicntenctsbarcceanar 155 Preset Sound Settings Sound Mode 156 Sound Setting Adjustment User Mode 157 infinite Soun
62. So Check and un check programmes in the USB menu FAV Displays the selected favourite programme ows Bw Que 0 l CHAR NUM Shifts the Character or Number for NetCast menu 3D Use this to view 3D video gt p 88 NOILVHYdJ d E Fav Eia mnor DELETE Deletes the entered character when entering the ES character on the screen keyboard MUTE Switches the sound on or off Programme Selects a programme UP DOWN PAGE UP Move from one full set of screen information to the DOWN next one SIMPLINK Controls SIMPLINK or MY MEDIA menu Photo List MY MEDIA Music List and Movie List Menu control buttons G Ce Crm Ww Installing Batteries fo Tig ical ae UR SELECT m Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install the batteries matching correct polarity with with m Install two 1 5 V AAA batteries Do not mix old or used batter ies with new ones m Close cover To remove the batteries perform the installation actions in reverse LCD TV MODELS 32 37 42LD4 32 37 42 47 55LD6 32 42 47LD7 32 37 42LD8 ACCESSORIES Ensure that the following accessories are included with your TV If an accessory is missing please contact the dealer where you purchased the TV m Image shown may differ from your TV gt Owner s Manual Batteries Remote Control AAA Owner s Manual Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials CD This item is not included for all m
63. TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE m When you select the Set Audio Set Audio Sound Mode Auto Volume Clear Voice II Balance J Previous m f you don t press any button for a while during the playing the play information box as shown in the below will float as a screen saver m The Screen Saver Screen saver is to prevent screen pixel damage due to an fixed image remaining on the screen for a extended period of time MM 002 B02 mp3 we gt 00 31 04 04 NOTE gt A damaged or corrupted music does not play but displays 00 00 in playtime gt A music downloaded from a paid service with copyright protection does not start but displays inappropriate information in playtime gt If you press OK m buttons screen saver is stopped gt The PLAY gt Pause ll m gt gt lt lt buttons on the remote control are also available in this mode gt You can use the gt gt button to select the next music and the lt lt button to select the previous music AJDIAAG Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL i 125 AJDIAAG Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL 126 TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE DIVX REGISTRATION CODE Confirm the DivX registration code number of the TV Using the registration number movies can be rented or purchased at www divx com vod With a DivX registration code from other TV playback of rented or purchased DivX file is not allowed Only DivX files matched with the registration code of the pu
64. USB Label DLNA Device Selection d Previous e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen Precautions when using the USB device gt Only a USB storage device is recognizable gt If the USB storage device is connected through a USB hub the device is not recognizable gt A USB storage device using an automatic recognition programme may not be recognized gt A USB storage device which uses its own driver may not be recognized gt The recognition speed of a USB storage device may depend on each device gt Please do not turn off the TV or unplug the USB device when the connected USB storage device is working When such device is suddenly separated or unplugged the stored files or the USB storage device may be damaged gt Please do not connect the USB storage device which was artificially maneuvered on the PC The device may cause the product to malfunction or fail to be played Never forget to use only a USB stor age device which has normal music files image files or movie files gt Please use only a USB storage device which was formatted as a FAT32 file system NTFS file system provided with the Windows operating system In case of a storage device formatted as a different utility programme which is not supported by Windows it may not be recognized gt Please connect power to a USB storage device over 0 5 A which requires an external power supply If not the device may n
65. USB1 External Drive Page 1 1 gt Moves to upper level folder 001 BO1 mp3 002 B02 mp3 003 BO3 mp3 004 BO4 mp3 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Current page Total pages Corresponding buttons on the wo remote control 005 B05 mp3 Contents under the folder focused on Current page total pages of TOR i EN Wo contents under the folder Change Device To Movie List E Change Numbers Mark Mode Exit focused on AVDIAAG Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL p 117 AJDIAAG Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL i 118 TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE Music Selection J Music List USB1 External Drivet Page 1 1 001 BO1 mp3 002 B02 mp3 003 BO3 mp3 004 BO4 mp3 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 005 B05 mp3 00 00 COE a gt A E MARK VENS Change Device E To Movie List E Change Numbers Mark Mode Exit m When playing music files 1 Select the target folder or drive OG Select the desired music title 3 Pa Music files are played Using the remote control e Use the P button to navigate up down in the music page Change device Return to normal TV viewing m When selected music files are played Jd Music List Mark Mode USB1 External Drive1 001 B01 mp3 002 B02 mp3 00 00 00 00 005 B05 mp3 00 00 EWAN ELC E Mark All EE Unmark All Select the target folder or drive Select the desired music title Convert to Mark Mode Mark desired music file Marked music file is played
66. a wall m We recommend that you purchase a wall mount ing bracket which supports VESA standard m LG recommends that wall mounting be per formed by a qualified professional installer A 32 REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS When using the remote control aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV LIGHT ENERGY AVMODE INPUT 0680 SAVING Eza ea D Ca CE Ga CO ED Es mnb y POWER LIGHT ENERGY SAVING AV MODE INPUT TV RAD NetCast THUMBSTICK Up Down Left Right OK GUIDE Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby You can turn the light of the remote control button on or off NOILVdaVvdsdd 7 Adjust the Energy Saving mode of the TV gt p 138 It helps you select and set images and sounds when connecting AV devices p 66 External input mode rotate in regular sequence gt p 57 Selects Radio TV and DIV programme Selects a menu Clears all on screen displays and returns to TV viewing from any menu gt p 31 Select the desired NetCast menu source gt p 68 AccuWeather Picasa YouTube and etc NetCast menu source can differ by country Select the desired quick menu source Aspect Ratio Clear Voice Il Picture Mode Sound Mode Audio or Audio Language Sleep Timer Skip Off On USB Device p 30 Allows you to navigate the on screen menus and adjust the system settings to your preference Ac
67. also adjust tint in the PICTURE menu Transmission k D L Set ID Data Cr Data Red 00 to Green 64 Refer to Real data mapping 1 See page 207 Ack I Set ID OK NG Datal x 10 Sharpness Command k k gt To adjust the screen sharpness You can also adjust sharpness in the PICTURE menu Transmission k k Set ID Data Cr Data Min 00 to Max 64 Refer to Real data mapping 1 See page 207 Ack Ik Set ID OK NG Data x 11 OSD Select Command k I gt To select OSD On Screen Display on off when con trolling remotely Transmission KINE Set ID Data Cr Data 00 OSD off 01 OSD on Ack IL Set ID OK NG Datal x 12 Remote control lock mode Command k m gt To lock the front panel controls on the monitor and remote control Transmission k m Set ID Data Cr Data 00 Lock off 01 Lock on Ack m Set ID OK NG Data x If you are not using the remote control use this mode When main power is on off external control lock is released In the standby mode if key lock is on TV will not turn on by power on key of IR amp Local Key 13 Treble Command k r gt To adjust treble You can also adjust treble in the AUDIO menu Transmission klir Set ID Data Cr Data Min 00 to Max 64 x Refer to Real data mapping 1 See page 207 Ack ir Set ID OK NG Data x 14 Bass Command k s
68. available AP Access Point or wireless routers within range and display them as a list Select an AP Access Point or wireless router on the list If your AP is locked insert the security key of AP Select NETWORK Select Network Setting Select Wireless If you already set Network Setting Input the security key of AP Select Resetting The new connection settings resets Q Repeat step 4 5 on P 20 the current network settings Select Setting from the AP list When a security code is already set PIN Personal Identification Number If you want to connect the AP Access Point or router with PIN use this feature Selecting AP Select AP you want to connect Connecting with PIN mode Page 1 1 Insert PIN number at the AP webpage and Input the new SSID press Connect button liptime eval 1234567 iptime Qc PIN NUMBER 345670 ASW au gt Access Point arc For more information check the AP manual Network1 ul Next Connecting with PIN mode ee da Previous da Previous 1 Repeat step 1 6 on P 24 Connect the access point with PIN mode m PIN number is the unique 8 digit number 2 You can see the Network ID and Security Key of the dongle on your TV screen Enter the PIN number to your device VA Select Connect D Repeat step 4 5 on P 20 dNLAS LNAWdINOA WNYsALXS f 25 dNLAS LNAWdINOA WNYsALXS i 26 EXTERNA
69. can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with a two step method 1 we copyright the library and 2 we offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the library To protect each distributor we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library Also if the library is modified by someone else and passed on the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version so that the original author s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others Finally software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder Therefore we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license Most GNU software including some libraries is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License This license the GNU Lesser General Public License applies to certain designated libraries and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non free programs When a progr
70. cities from Favorite City gt LG is not responsible for the accuracy of the weather forecast gt Applicable weather information can differ from the actual weather depending on the information provided by Accuweather ISVOLAN E 73 ISVOLAN 74 NETCAST PICASA Picasa is an application from Google that appreciates digital image files Picasa Screen Components Picasa menu Photos list Corresponding buttons on the remote control Picasa Service menu e Home The featured photos list will be displayed e Friends You can register users with the pictures you want as friends You can add up to 10 friends e Search The keypad keyboard menu will be displayed e My Photos You can view the pictures uploaded to the Web This function can only be used when you sign in e Sign in Sign Out Displays the keypad keyboard menu to sign in or returns to the sign out status ISVOLAN E 75 HLOOLAN Td Y ASN OL E 76 TO USE THE BLUETOOTH Except for 32 37 42 Eq 32 37 42 47 55LE5 42 47LE 73 32 37 42LD4 32 37 42 47 55LD6 32 42 47LD7 32 37 42LD8 42 47LX6 47 55LX9 50 60PK5 50 60PX9 BLUETOOTH Bluetooth is a short distance networking technology using 2 4 GHz frequency to connect various types of information devices such as computers cell phones and PDAs as well as digital appliances through wireless connection without having to connect any cable to enable da
71. control the brightness of the screen adjust the brightness of LCD panel Adjusting the backlight when setting the brightness of the set is recommended Contrast Adjusts the signal level between black and white in the picture You may use Contrast when the bright part of the picture is saturated Brightness Adjusts the base level of the signal in the picture Sharpness Adjusts the level of crispness in the edges between the light and dark areas of the picture The lower the level the softer the image Colour _ Adjusts intensity of all colours Tint Colou adjusts the balance between red and green levels r Temp Adjust to left direction to make a picture reddish or adjust to right direction to make a picture bluish It is not available to use this function in Intelligent Sensor Except for 32 37 42LD4 LCD TV LED LCD TV only J PICTURE e Aspect Ratio 16 9 e Picture Wizard Y Standard i 0 e egEnergy Saving Off ry e Picture Mode Standard O e Backlight 70 M g e Contrast 100 mE m e Brightness 50 O Intelligent Sensor v Standard Except for 42 47 55LE8 only 42 47 55LE8 Select PICTURE Select Picture Mode Select Vivid Standard Cinema Except for 42 47 55LE8 Sport or Game Select Backlight Contrast Brightness Sharpness Colour Tint or Colour Temp Make appropriate adjustments Plasma TV only L PICTURE
72. gender cable Gaver Ferrite core can be used to reduce the electromagnetic Se Dy wave when connecting the power cord A The closer the location of the ferrite core to the power SY plug the better it is S Install the power plug closely NOILVaVvdsdd 7 A 27 NOILVdVdsdd E A 28 PREPARATION FRONT PANEL CONTROLS NOTE gt TV can be placed in standby mode in order to reduce the power consumption And TV should be switched off using the power switch on the TV if it will not be watched for some time as this will reduce energy consumption The energy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the level of brightness of the picture is reduced and this will reduce the overall running cost A CAUTION gt Do not step on the glass stand or subject it to any impact It may break causing possible injury from frag ments of glass or the TV may fall gt Do not drag the TV The floor or the product may be damaged m Image shown may differ from your TV PROGRAMME VOLUME SPEAKER Emitter It is the part equipped with the emitter exchanging signal with 3D glasses Please be careful not to block the screen with objects or people while watching a 3D Video Intelligent Sensor Adjusts picture according to the surrounding conditions Remote Control Sensor Power Standby Indicator Can be adjusted using the Power Indicator in the OPTION menu BACK PANEL INFORMATION m Image s
73. it stopped previously Using the remote control ll Stop the playing movie file ecocereecerec eee eee eee eee eee ee ee meee eee eee eee ree eee reese eee ees e rere ee rere eee ese eseer eee eee eee eee e eee ee eee ere ree e ree eres eee eee ree e rere eee eee ee eeeee eer eee rere ee eee eee eee During playback press the Pause II button m Still screen is displayed Il m f no buttons are pressed on the remote control for 10 minutes after pausing the TV returns to the playback state Press the Pause II button and then use the FF gt gt button for slow motion When playing repeatedly press the REW lt lt button to speed up lt lt x2 gt lt lt lt x4 gt AA AA X8 gt dd 444 K16 gt 444 x32 lt 4 lt gt gt repeatedly press the FF gt gt button to speed up gt gt x2 gt gt gt gt x4 gt gt gt gt P x8 gt gt P gt gt gt x16 gt P gt P PP x32 m Pressing these buttons repeatedly increases the fast forward reverse speed eceso i ey AJDIAAG Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL i fre or Show the Option menu Hide the menu on the full sized screen son m To see the menu again on the full sized screen press OK button to display Return to normal TV viewing EXIT g m When using the or button during playback a cursor indicating the position can ee C2 o De viewed on the screen EEn Press the ENERGY SAVING button repeatedly to change the brightness of your red
74. mode Select the date to schedule Wed 12 Aug 2009 13 46 Select Remind or Record function setting Type Start Time End Time Programme Select Type Start Time End time or GS 5 9 17 30 overa Close Programme eae ee Change to Guide mode Move ox de Exit Programme Guide E Schedule List Change to Schedule List mode Save Timer Record Remind JQOW IWLISIC NI j 3dIN9 AWNWVYDONd JINO H19373 9d3 133 JQOW IWLISIC NI i JdIND AWNVYDONd DINOYLO3A14 9d3 134 EPG ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE Button Function in Schedule List Mode If you ve created a schedule list a scheduled programme is displayed at the scheduled time even when you are watching a different programme at the time Currently recording item cannot be edited or deleted reo Change to Manual Timer mode five or Change to Guide mode Switch off Schedule List OK Select your desired Option Modify Delete Delete All Select programme Page Up Down Schedule List Page1 1 Fri 6 Apr 2007 15 09 Start Date Start Time Title Friend2 Friend1 16 00 Friend2 Modify Q Delete Delete All Remind DTV 19 Dave Fri 06 05 2007 16 00 Close Move Modify Delete Pia Page Change J Exit Manual Timer I Programme Guide PICTURE CONTROL PICTURE SIZE ASPECT RATIO CONTROL You can watch the screen in various picture formats 16 9 Just S
75. of either DVB CI or Cl plus A abnormal process of CAM Conditional Access Module may cause a bad picture Y Viaccess Module SETUP e Auto Tuning Consultations Authorizations e Manual Tuning Module information e Programme Edit e Booster Off a Cl Information 7 Select the item i e This OSD is only for illustration and the menu options and screen format will vary according to the Digital pay services provider e It is possible for you to change CI Common Interface menu screen and service by consult ing your dealer Select SETUP Select CI Information Select the desired item Module information smart card information language or software download etc e Press the BACK EXIT button to move to the previous menu screen SOFTWARE UPDATE You can update the TV with the latest software to enhance the product operation and or add new features You can update the software by connecting the TV directly to the software update server The Software Update function may not work properly depending on your internet environment In this case you can obtain the latest software from the authorized LG Electronics Service Center then update your TV ae 0 D Software Update Software Update O Picture Test e Current version E Sound Test ta l E 00 00 01 O Signal Test ce C Product Service Info E Network Test Check Update Version o NETWORK BLUETOOTH
76. on if you wish to use the Auto Setting If the Network Setting is not completed network may not operate normally IP Auto Setting Select it if there is a DHCP server on the local area network LAN via wired connection the TV will automatically be allocated an IP address If you re using a broadband router or broadband modem that has a DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server function the IP address will automatically be determined IP Manual Setting Select it if there is no DHCP server on the network and you want to set the IP address manually dNLAS LNAWdINOA WNYsALXS f 21 dNLAsS LNAWdINOA WNYsALXS i 22 NOTE gt For more information about Netcast setup and troubleshooting visit http Igknowledgebase com Search for Netcast gt Use a standard LAN cable with this TV Cat5 or better with a RJ45 connector gt Many network connection problems during set up can often be fixed by re setting the router or modem After connecting the player to the home network quickly power off and or dis connect the power cable of the home network router or cable modem Then power on and or connect the power cable again gt Depending on the internet service provider ISP the number of devices that can receive internet service may be limited by the applicable terms of service For details contact your ISP gt LG is not responsible for any malfunction of the TV and or the internet connection feature due to
77. operates on an AC power The volt age is indicated on the Specifications ade gt oa to 200 Never attempt to operate the TV on DC power LAN Network connection for AccuWeather Picasa YouTube etc Also used for video photo and music files on a local network OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT Connect digital audio to various types of equipment Connect to a Digital Audio Component Use an Optical audio cable RGB DVI Audio Input Connect the audio from a PC or DTV Euro Scart Socket AV1 Connect scart socket input or output from an external device to these jacks Component Input Connect a component video audio device to these jacks HDMI DVI IN Input Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN Or DVI VIDEO signal to HDMI DVI port with DVI to HDMI cable Except for Only 32 37 42LD4 32 37 42LD4 USB IN 2 NOILVaVdsdd 7 Veo Tum HPO HDMIINS PCMCIA CARD SLOTY USBIN4 RGB IN Input Connect the output from a PC WIRELESS Control Except for 32 37 42LD4 Connect the Wireless Ready Dongle to the TV to control the external input devices con nected to Wireless Media Box wirelessly RS 232C IN CONTROL amp SERVICE PORT Connect to the RS 232C port on a PC This port is used for Service or Hotel mode Antenna Input Connect antenna or cable to this jack USB Input Connect USB storage device to this jack PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Association
78. pop up window where Favourite group can be changed Select a Favourite group Ne wo BOOSTER If reception is poor select Booster to On When the signal is strong select Off ie c SETUP e Auto Tuning e Manual Tuning e Programme Edit e Booster e Cl Information E Select SETUP Select Booster ox Select On or Off Loy J e Auto Tuning e Manual Tuning e Programme Edit e Booster e Cl Information e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen JOYLNOO ANWVESDOdd AL ONIHOLVM 5 47 TOYLNOOD ANWVYSDOdd AL ONIHOLVM E 48 WATCHING TV PROGRAMME CONTROL Cl COMMON INTERFACE INFORMATION This function enables you to watch some encrypted services pay services If you remove the Cl Module you cannot watch pay services When the module is inserted into the Cl slot you can access the module menu To purchase a module and smart card contact your dealer Do not repeatedly insert or remove a Cl module from the TV This may cause a malfunction When the TV is turned on after inserting a Cl Module you may not have any sound output This may be incompatible with the Cl module and smart card Cl Common Interface functions may not be possible depending upon the country broadcasting cir cumstances When using a CAM Conditional Access Module please make sure it meets fully the requirements
79. refresh rate to another rate or adjust the brightness and contrast on the menu until the picture is clear If the refresh rate of the PC graphic card can not be changed change the PC graphic card or consult the manufacturer of the PC graphic card gt The synchronization input waveform for Horizontal and Vertical frequencies are separate gt We recommend using 1920x1080 60 Hz for the PC mode this should provide the best picture quality gt Connect the signal cable from the monitor output port of the PC to the RGB PC port of the TV or the signal cable from the HDMI output port of the PC to the HDMI IN or HDMI DVI IN port on the TV EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP gt Connect the audio cable from the PC to the Audio input on the TV Audio cables are not included with the TV gt If using a sound card adjust PC sound as required gt If the graphic card on the PC does not output ana logue and digital RGB simultaneously connect only one of either RGB or HDMI IN or HDMI DVI IN to display the PC output on the TV gt If the graphic card on the PC does output analogue and digital RGB simultaneously set the TV to either RGB or HDMI the other mode is set to Plug and Play automatically by the TV gt DOS mode may not work depending on the video card if you use an HDMI to DVI cable gt If you use too long an RGB PC cable there may be interference on the screen We recommend using under 5m of cable This provides th
80. rights granted to You by such Participant under Sections 2 1 b and 2 2 b are revoked effective as of the date You first made used sold distributed or had made Modifications made by that Participant 8 3 If You assert a patent infringement claim against Participant alleging that such Participant s Contributor Version directly or indirectly infringes any patent where such claim is resolved such as by license or settlement prior to the initiation of patent infringement litigation then the reasonable value of the licenses granted by such Participant under Sections 2 1 or 2 2 shall be taken into account in determining the amount or value of any payment or license 8 4 In the event of termination under Sections 8 1 or 8 2 above all end user license agreements excluding distrib utors and resellers which have been validly granted by You or any distributor hereunder prior to termination shall survive termination 9 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY WHETHER TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE SHALL YOU THE INITIAL DEVELOPER ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF COVERED CODE OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL WORK STOPPAGE COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES EVE
81. screen Refer to p 138 AY MODE Press the AV MODE button repeatedly to select the desired source Refer to p 66 103 TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE m When you select the Set Video Play Set Video Play Picture Size Audio Language Subtitle Language e Language e Code page e Sync e Position e Size Repeat O C U m gt Subtitle Language C U Latin1 O J U Latin2 gJ m Latin4 Cyrilli O yrillic m Greek Turkish NOTE lt English gt lt Default gt Normal lt a On gt J Previous Support Language English Spanish French German Italian Swedish Finnish Dutch Portuguese Danish Romanian Norwegian Albanian Gaelic Welsh Irish Catalan Valencian Bosnian Polish Croatian Czech Slovak Slovenian Serbian Hungarian Estonian Latvian Lithuanian Bulgarian Macedonian Russian Ukrainian Kazakh Greek Turkish gt Picture Size Selects your desired picture format during movie play gt Audio Language Changes the Language Group of the audio during movie play Files with a single audio track cannot be selected gt Subtitle Langugae Turn on off the subtitle gt Language Activated for SMI subtitle and can select the language within the subtitle gt Code page Can select the font for subti tle When set to default same font as gen eral menu will be used gt Sync Adjusts the time
82. survive any termination of this License Provisions which by their nature must remain in effect beyond the termination of this License shall survive 8 2 If You initiate litigation by asserting a patent infringement claim excluding declatory judgment actions against Initial Developer or a Contributor the Initial Developer or Contributor against whom You file such action is referred to as Participant alleging that a such Participant s Contributor Version directly or indirectly infringes any patent then any and all rights granted by such Participant to You under Sections 2 1 and or 2 2 of this License shall upon 60 days notice from Participant terminate prospectively unless if within 60 days after receipt of notice You either i agree in writing to pay Participant a mutually agreeable reasonable royalty for Your past and future use of Modifications made by such Participant or ii withdraw Your litigation claim with respect to the Contributor Version against such Participant If within 60 days of notice a reasonable royalty and payment arrangement are not mutually agreed upon in writing by the parties or the litigation claim is not withdrawn the rights granted by Participant to You under Sections 2 1 and or 2 2 automatically terminate at the expiration of the 60 day notice period specified above b any software hardware or device other than such Participant s Contributor Version directly or indirectly infringes any patent then any
83. that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors reputations Finally any free program is threatened constantly by software patents We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses in effect making the program proprietary To prevent this we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone s free use or not licensed at all The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License The Program below refers to any such program or work and a work based on the Program means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Program or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Each licensee is addressed as you Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running the Program is not restricted and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute
84. the appropriate decompression or de archiving software is widely available for no charge 1 12 You or Your means an individual or a legal entity exercising rights under and complying with all of the terms of this License or a future version of this License issued under Section 6 1 For legal entities You includes any entity which controls is controlled by or is under common control with You For purposes of this definition control means a the power direct or indirect to cause the direction or manage ment of such entity whether by contract or otherwise or b ownership of more than fifty percent 50 of the out standing shares or beneficial ownership of such entity 2 Source Code License 2 1 The Initial Developer Grant The Initial Developer hereby grants You a world wide royalty free non exclusive license subject to third party intel lectual property claims a under intellectual property rights other than patent or trademark Licensable by Initial Developer to use reproduce modify display perform sublicense and distribute the Original Code or portions thereof with or without Modifications and or as part of a Larger Work and b under Patents Claims infringed by the making using or selling of Original Code to make have made use practice sell and offer for sale and or otherwise dispose of the Original Code or portions thereof c the licenses granted in this Section 2 1 a and b are effectiv
85. the followings converts back to the From the TV Menu choose OPTION gt Choose Mode Setting gt Choose initial settings after a Home use Now you have completed switching to the Home use mode certain period of time XIGNAddV i ee N MAINTENANCE Early malfunctions can be prevented Careful and regular cleaning can prolong the life of your new TV Caution Be sure to switch the power off and unplug the power cord before you begin any cleaning Cleaning the Screen A good way to keep the dust off your screen for a while is to wet a soft cloth in a mixture of luke warm water and a little fabric softener or dish washing detergent Wring the cloth until it is almost dry and then use it to wipe the screen Ensure there is no excess water on the screen Allow any water or dampness to evaporate before switching on Cleaning the Cabinet m To remove dirt or dust wipe the cabinet with a soft dry lint free cloth Do not to use a wet cloth Extended Absence A CAUTION gt If you expect to leave your TV dormant for prolonged periods such as a holiday unplug the power cord to protect against possible damage from lightning or power surges XIGNAddV i 83 APPENDIX PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS W B HRS Dimensions Width x Height x Depth with stand without stand with stand Weight oe without stand Power requirement Power Consumption WO DH RS Dimensions with stand Width x He
86. the screen The picture is improved by making bright parts brighter and dark parts darker D Colour m Adjusts screen colours so that they look livelier richer and clearer This fea Oft Low ture enhances hue saturation and luminance so that red blue green and Medium Plasma TV only s white look more vivid o census Skin Colour m Adjusts skin colour of the picture so that user can set his favourite skin 5 to 5 colour Noise Reduction Off Low Medium High Auto In Analogue Mode Only Digital Noise Reduction Low Medium High Off m You can adjust brightness of dark area and middle gray level area of the picture Comma e Low 1 9 Makes dark and middle gray level area of the picture brighter Advanced Control e Medium 2 2 Expresses original picture levels a e High 2 4 Makes dark and middle gray level area of the picture darker T 312 4 i m When Antenna is used as input signal it is set to Medium and deactivated si nan Plasma TV only U E E A A cece E A E O e Low The picture of the screen gets darker 1 e High The picture of the screen gets brighter s Black Level e Auto Sets black level of the screen to High or Low automatically according to T Low High Auto the input signal level O m This function enables to select Low or High in the following mode O cut M NTSC M HDMI or Component Otherwise Black level is set to Auto i AJ konpa m Makes the white area of the screen brighter and clearer
87. this case set Bluetooth to Off HLOOLAN 18 Y ASN OL i 81 TO USE A BLUETOOTH REMOVE THE BLUETOOTH DEVICE When 12 devices are registered you cannot register any more devices and the external device will no longer be able to pair up with the TV In this case you should delete one disconnect first if a device is connected to the TV and then you can register another device Remove device will be available when selecting the device that is not connected to the TV d Exit d Exit Qj Bluetooth QJ Bluetooth 1 1 Bluetooth off Bluetooth off F DR B k w Search headset Search headset _ Remove device E My Info E My Info HLOOLAN Td Y ASN OL N Select BLUETOOTH Select Remove device p Select Delete Oe Remove the Bluetooth device e Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen MY BLUETOOTH INFORMATION This function provides the My Bluetooth Information to the user Edit will be available when TV is not connected with any device You can edit the Setup TV PIN or Setup TV name You can check the TV address To accept connection from an external Bluetooth device or to connect to an external Bluetooth device the PIN needs to be entered For details on how to set the PIN of the external Bluetooth device refer to the user manual of the applicable device The TV PIN is composed of numbers
88. to the maximum extent possible whether at the time of the ini tial grant or subsequently acquired any and all of the rights conveyed herein 1 9 Modifications means any addition to or deletion from the substance or structure of either the Original Code or any previous Modifications When Covered Code is released as a series of files a Modification is A Any addition to or deletion from the contents of a file containing Original Code or previous Modifications B Any new file that contains any part of the Original Code or previous Modifications 1 10 Original Code means Source Code of computer software code which is described in the Source Code notice required by Exhibit Aas Original Code and which at the time of its release under this License is not already Covered Code governed by this License 1 10 1 Patent Claims means any patent claim s now owned or hereafter acquired including without limitation method process and apparatus claims in any patent Licensable by grantor 1 11 Source Code means the preferred form of the Covered Code for making modifications to it including all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files scripts used to control compilation and installation of an Executable or source code differential comparisons against either the Original Code or another well known available Covered Code of the Contributor s choice The Source Code can be in a compressed or archival form provided
89. under the folder focused on a Vo OLAS o Eee MARK DETS Change Device E To Photo List M Change Numbers __ Mark Mode 1 Exit e Some files may be displayed e Non supported files are e Abnormal files are the preview image by icon displayed the preview displayed in the only image by icon only form of bitmap Movie Selection m When playing movie files oe Movie List Be USB1 External Drive1 Page 1 1 OOE a EEA MARK AVETS Change Device E To Photo List O Change Numbers Mark Mode Exit Select the target folder or drive e Use the P y button to navigation in the movie page Select the desired movie title Movie files are played SG Using the remote control Change device Press the PLAY gt button to return to normal playback v AVIAAG Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL i 99 AQDIAAG Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL i 100 TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE m When selected movie files are played Y Movie List Mark Mode USB1 External Drivet Page 1 1 bE le i Move Mark Pi EAE A MARK Mark EWAN ELC E Mark All MB Unmark All Exit Mark Mode Exit e When one or more movie files are marked the marked movies will be played in sequence oS Select the desired movie title OC Convert to Mark Mode owe A Mark desired Movie file Marked movie file is played FO Select the target folder or drive NOTE gt In the case of files not supported a message regarding non supported fil
90. user would be likely to look for such a notice If You created one or more Modification s You may add your name as a Contributor to the notice described in Exhibit A You must also duplicate this License in any documentation for the Source Code where You describe recipients rights or ownership rights relating to Covered Code You may choose to offer and to charge a fee for warranty support indemnity or liability obligations to one or more recipients of Covered Code However You may do so only on Your own behalf and not on behalf of the Initial Developer or any Contributor You must make it absolutely clear than any such warranty support indemnity or liabil ity obligation is offered by You alone and You hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by the Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result of warranty support indemnity or lia bility terms You offer 3 6 Distribution of Executable Versions You may distribute Covered Code in Executable form only if the requirements of Section 3 1 3 5 have been met for that Covered Code and if You include a notice stating that the Source Code version of the Covered Code is avail able under the terms of this License including a description of how and where You have fulfilled the obligations of Section 3 2 The notice must be conspicuously included in any notice in an Executable version related documenta tion or collateral in which You des
91. when the service operator is set to Ziggo or Other Operators of Netherlands Except for 42 47LX6 47 55LX9 50 60PX9 TOYLNOO ANWVESDOdd AL ONIHOLVM E e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen 40 MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING IN ANALOGUE MODE Manual Tuning lets you manually tune and arrange the stations in whatever order you desire t SETUP SETUP e Auto Tuning e Auto Tuning e Manual Tuning e Manual Tuning a lt Cable TV gt e Programme Edit a Programme Edit pede Storage e Booster Off e Booster e System a amp e System e Cl Information Lo e Cl Information Band zi e Band h Penante e Channel e Fine e Fine lt gt Li e Search E ms Name ae me Store Store si an ose Eose Close F ea SETUP Select V UHF or Cable Select the desired channel number Select Manual Tuning or s E E lt e Commence searching o sete TV or Cable TV ie A Select the desired Se Select Store a or cabal programme number on SG owes a TV system e Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4 digit password in Lock System On e L SECAM L L France BG PAL B G SECAM B G Europe East Europe Asia New Zealand M East Africa e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to
92. when using the DVD or the Digital set top box depends on connector e RGB Select it when using PC depends on connector e HDMI Select it when using DVD PC or Digital set top box depend on connector TOHLNOOS JIWWYH9O d AL ONIHOLVM N 57 TOYLNOO ANWWVESDOdd AL ONIHOLVM E 58 WATCHING TV PROGRAMME CONTROL INPUT LABEL Selects a label for each input source m Image shown may differ from your TV Input List _ bed S i Eo 5 USB1 USB2 AV1 AV2 Component _ 4 HDMI1 HDMI2 HDMI3 HDMI4 MM input Label o Exit d Select the label Select Input Label Select the source Input Label v Close e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen DATA SERVICE This menu is enabled only in Ireland This function allow users to choose between MHEG Digital Teletext and Teletext if both exist at the same time If only one of them exists either MHEG or Teletext is enabled regardless of which option you select ed be OPTION e Language Language e Country Ireland e Disability Assistance e Power Indicator e Data Service MHEG e Factory Reset e Set ID 4 e Mode Settina Home Use Select OPTION Se
93. you can see the changed result as an example In RGB PC HDMI PC DVI PC mode the changed Colour Tint and H V Sharpness values are not applied ol PICTURE Picture Wizard a With Picture Wizard you can adjust the picture quality of the _ e Aspect Ratio 16 9 original image TES Saving Off E j C k e Picture Mode Standard _ Kr I e Backlight 70 M ae e Contrast 100 CE Brightness 50 EEEE d Previous If you stop the setting before the final stage the changes Select PICTURE will not be applied The adjustment value is saved to Expert1 sees Picture Wizard Once the Picture Wizard sets the image quality the Energy Standard Black Level White Level Saving is changed into Off Tint Colour Horizontal Sharpness Vertical l If the picture quality setting Sharpness Backlight LCD TV LED LCD TV of Expert1 is changed use OK only or Preferred Black Level White Level the Picture Reset before Tint Colour Sharpness Dynamic Contrast Colour Temperature Backlight LCD TV LED entering the Picture Wizard LCD TV only TOHLNOO 3HNL ld E to reset the picture quality setting Standard mode to set stan dard picture quality Preferred mode to set user preferred picture quality rath er than standard picture MARK HAR NUM Select input source to apply the settings e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to m
94. 00 ZA 55LE5900 ZA 1306 0 mm x 867 0 mm x 328 0 mm 1306 0 mm x 797 0 mm x 30 7 mm 34 5 kg 28 8 kg AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 200 W 42LX6500 ZD 42LX650N ZD 42LX6800 ZD 42LX6900 ZD 1016 0 mm x 692 0 mm x 270 0 mm 55LE5510 ZB 55LE551N ZB 55LE5810 ZB 55LE5910 ZB 1306 0 mm x 867 0 mm x 328 0 mm 1306 0 mm x 797 0 mm x 30 7 mm 34 5 kg 28 8 kg AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 200 W 47LX6500 ZD 47LX650N ZD 47LX6800 ZD 47LX6900 ZD 1126 6 mm x 757 9 mm x 284 4 mm 0 C to 40 C Temperature Less than 80 Environment condition Operating Humidity Storage Temperature Storage Humidity 20 C to 60 C Less than 85 Supported movie files Refer to p 96 to 97 m The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement XIGNAddV i 18 W B i RS Dimensions Width x Height x Depth with stand without stand with stand Weight eI without stand Power requirement Power Consumption W B HRS Dimensions Width x Height x Depth with stand without stand with stand Weight without stand Power requirement Power Consumption CI Module Size Width x Height x Depth Operating Temperature Environment condition Operating Humidity Storage Temperature Storage Humidity Supported movie files 32LE7500 ZA 32LE750N ZA 32LE7800 ZA 32LE7900 ZA 786 4 mm x 556 2 mm x 221 0 mm 786 4 mm x 500 4 mm x 39 9 mm 14
95. 07 TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE Photo Selection m When playing photo files Photo List USB1 External San Vo MONS OE E MARK IVE Change Device E To Music List HB Change Numbers Mark Mode Exit e Use the P button to navigation in the Select the target folder or drive photo page Select the desired photos Photo files are displayed OQ J9IlA3d Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL i Using the remote control Change device Return to normal TV viewing 108 When selected photo files are displayed A Photo List Mark Mode USB1 External Drive Page 1 1 oe Tae Vo MOMS EAEE MARK DVE View Marked E Mark All E Unmark All Exit Mark Mode Exit 1 Select the target folder or drive e When one or more photos are marked you l can view each marked photo or a slide show of the marked photos If no photos are Select the desired photos marked you can view every individual photo v in the folder or a slide show of all photos in the folder MARK Convert to Mark Mode or A Mark desired photo file Marked photo file is displayed AVIAAG Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL p 109 AJDIAAG Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL i 110 TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE Using the remote control Display the selected photo file Return to normal TV viewing How to view photo Detailed operations are available on full sized photo view screen Photo List USB1 External Drive Page 1 1 OCON E EE E MARK AVETS Change Device To
96. 1 High Profile Level 4 1 H 264 AVC e g 720p60 108060 1080p30 MPEG 4 Part 2 720p 1080i AAC AAC LC and HE AAC Main Profile Level 4 1 High Profile Level 4 1 encoded by the open e g 720p60 1080i60 1080p30 source x264 codec AAC AAC LC and HE AAC Dolby Digital H 264 AVC Main Profile Level 4 1 High Profile Level 4 1 e g 720p60 1080i60 1080p30 MPEG 2 Main Profile High Level e g 720960 1080i60 Simple Profile Medium Level e g CIF QVGA Main Profile High Level e g 1080p30 Advanced Profile Level3 e g 720p60 1080i60 1080p30 MPEG 1Layer II MPEG 1 Layer III MP3 AAC AAC LC and HE AAC MPEG 1 MPEG 2 Dolby Digital MPEG 1Layer I Il DVD LPCM H 264 AVC Only streams com pliant to SMPTE 421M VC 1 stand ard are supported Main Profile High Level e g 720p60 1080i60 Main Profile High Level e g 720p60 1080i60 MPEG 1Layer I Il Only streams compliant configured properly for TS PS or ES JDIAAG Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL i 97 AJDIAAG Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL i 98 TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE Screen Components You can also adjust USB in the INPUT menu PTO Select MY MEDIA O Select Movie List Moves to upper level folder Current page Total pages CT Movie List Corresponding buttons on the USB1 External remote control as as as O Drive1 Page 1 1 Contents under the folder focused on Current page total pages of contents
97. 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 150 W 47LE7500 ZA 47LE750N ZA 47LE7800 ZA 47LE7900 ZA 47LE7510 ZB 47LE751N ZB 47LE7810 ZB 47LE7910 ZB 1128 6 mm x 758 5 mm x 284 4 mm 1128 6 mm x 758 5 mm x 284 4 mm 1128 6 mm x 693 3 mm x 29 8 mm 1128 6 mm x 693 3 mm x 29 8 mm 27 5 kg 23 0 kg 27 5 kg 23 0 kg AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 170 W AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 170 W 42LE7300 ZA 42LE730N ZA 42LE7380 ZA 42LE7390 ZA 1009 2 mm x 694 5 mm x 286 5 mm 1009 2 mm x 629 7 mm x 29 3 mm 25 5 kg 21 0 kg AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 150 W 47LE7300 ZA 47LE730N ZA 47LE7380 ZA 47LE7390 ZA 1119 6 mm x 757 1 mm x 286 5 mm 1119 6 mm x 691 3 mm x 29 3 mm 29 7 kg 20 2 kg AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 170 W 100 0 mm x 55 0 mm x 5 0 mm 0 C to 40 C Less than 80 20 C to 60 C Less than 85 Refer to p 96 to 97 m The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement 55LE7 Heard 55LE7500 ZA 55LE750N ZA a 55LE7510 ZB 55LE751N ZB 55LE7800 ZA 55LE7900 ZA 55LE7810 ZB 55LE7910 ZB Dimensions Width x Height x Depth with stand 1306 0 mm x 868 1 mm x 328 0 mm 1306 0 mm x 868 1 mm x 328 0 mm without stand with stand Weight ae without stand Power requirement AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz Power Consumption 200 W 200 W WO DH RS 47LX9800 ZA 55LX9800 ZA Dimensions with stand 1085 9 mm x 710 6 mm x 255 0 mm
98. 2C port on a PC This port is used for Service or Hotel mode WIRELESS Control Connect the Wireless Ready Dongle to the TV to control the external input devices con nected to Wireless Media Box wirelessly Audio Video Input Connect audio video output from an external device to these jacks Antenna Input Connect antenna or cable to this jack USB Input Connect USB storage device to this jack PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Association Card Slot oe Cl Module to PCMCIA CARD This feature is not available in all countries Headphone Socket Plug the headphone into the headphone socket STAND INSTALLATION m Image shown may differ from your TV When assembling the desk type stand check whether the bolt is fully tightened If not tightened fully the product can tilt forward after the product installation If you tighten the bolt with excessive force the bolt can deviate from abrasion of the tightening part of the bolt Carefully place the TV screen side down Assemble the parts of the Stand Rear on a cushioned surface to protect the Cover with the TV screen from damage Stand Rear Cover Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in the back of the TV 2 Assemble the parts of the Stand Body with the Stand Base of the TV At this time tighten the screws that hold the Stand Body on 1 a M4 X 16 M4 X 20 32 37 42 47 55LE5 Only 32 37 42 47LES
99. 53 TOYLNOO ANWVYSDOdd AL ONIHOLVM E 54 WATCHING TV PROGRAMME CONTROL SIMPLE MANUAL You can easily and effectively access the TV information by viewing a simple manual on the TV During the Simple Manual operation audio will be muted m Image shown may differ from your TV Simple Manual Remote Control Description Contents Lists Aute Tuning Energy Saving AY Madi Clear Yoza l Fucture Wiard hi MEDIA Customer Support HE Simple Manual Auto Launching aa En e RED Go to the Index page e BLUE Play the Simple Manual automatically or manually Select Simple Manual e Select the part of the manual you want to see e Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing SELECTING THE PROGRAMME LIST You can check which programmes are stored in the memory by displaying the programme list Mini Glossary Programme List f Displayed when the a Locked Programme EYI 2 BBC 3 BBC 4 BBC pm 5BBC A i Prec e You may find some blue programmes a Displaying programme LIST These have been set up to be skipped by auto programming or in the programme edit mode pispiey Mer TO amne Fist e Some programmes with the channel num ber shown in the programme LIST indicate there is no station name assigned Turn the programme edit m Selecting a programme in the programme list 1 The mode will be switched am Select a programme between TV DTV and Radio from the programm
100. 7 OG Select LOCK Select Lock System Select Input Block eas ny SONILVG JOYLNOO WLNSAdVd Select input source Select On or Off e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen 175 PARENTAL CONTROL RATINGS KEY LOCK This feature can be used to prevent unauthorized viewing by locking out the front panel controls so that it can only be used with the remote control This TV is programmed to remember which option it was last set to even if you turn the TV off LOCK LOCK E Al e Set Password me e Set Password adel e Lock System Off e Lock System Off e Block Programme e Block Programme e Parental Guidance Blocking Off a e Parental Guidance Blocking Off e Input Block e Key Lock Off e Input Block In Key Lock On if the TV is turned off press the 1 INPUT P button on the TV or POWER INPUT P or NUMBER buttons on the remote control then the set will be turned on Select Key Lock Se e With the Key Lock On the display LS Key Lock On appears on the screen if any button on OS FS seve On or Off the front panel is pressed while viewing the TV Wy e When another OSD is displayed LN Key Lock On will not operate Select LOCK SONILVG g JOYLNOOD 1VINdJHYd e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK bu
101. 8800 ZA 47LE8900 ZA 1122 6 mm x 769 3 mm x 275 0 mm 1122 6 mm x 707 3 mm x 34 5 mm 31 6 kg 27 0 kg AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 170 W 42LE8510 ZB 42LE851N ZB 42LE8810 ZB 42LE8910 ZB 1013 3 mm x 705 8 mm x 235 5 mm 1013 3 mm x 645 8 mm x 34 5 mm 27 2 kg 23 1 kg AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 160 W 47LE8510 ZB 47LE851N ZB 47LE8810 ZB 47LE8910 ZB 1122 6 mm x 769 3 mm x 275 0 mm 1122 6 mm x 707 3 mm x 34 5 mm 31 6 kg 27 0 kg AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 170 W 100 0 mm x 55 0 mm x 5 0 mm 0 C to 40 C Less than 80 20 C to 60 C Less than 85 Refer to p 96 to 97 m The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement SOLE8 MODES 55LE8500 ZA 55LE850N ZA 55LE8510 ZB 55LE851N ZB 55LE8800 ZA 55LE8900 ZA 55LE8810 ZB 55LE8910 ZB Dimensions with stand 1292 6 mm x 875 4 mm x 311 9 mm 1292 6 mm x 875 4 mm x 311 9 mm Width x Height x Depth a EAE EEE AE ATE E A ERA AE ANAE E EEN EEE AE NE AENA EEE EEA A A E E E S N E ERT without stand 1292 6 mm x 802 9 mm x 34 5 mm 1292 6 mm x 802 9 mm x 34 5 mm with stand 43 8 kg 43 8 kg Weight 9 without stand 35 8 kg 35 8 kg Power requirement AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz Power Consumption 230 W 230 W 32LD4 37LD4 thease 3aip4go ZB a 37LD480 2B its 32LD490 ZB 37LD490 ZB 916 0 mm x 625 0 mm x 261 0 mm Dimensions with stand 799 0 mm x 555 0 mm x 207 0 mm
102. AL CONTROL DEVICE SETUP RS 232C Setup Connect the RS 232C serial port input jack to an external control device such as a computer or an A V control system to control the product s func tions externally Connect the serial port of the control device to the RS 232C jack on the product back panel Note RS 232C connection cables are not supplied with the product Type of Connector D Sub 9 Pin Male No connection RXD Receive data TXD Transmit data DTR DTE side ready GND DSR DCE side ready RTS Ready to send CTS Clear to send No Connection OONDOARWDNDN RS 232C Configurations XIGNAddV i 7 Wire Configurations Standard RS 232C cable 3 Wire Configurations Not standard PC TV PC TV RXD 2 e _e 3 TXD RXD 2 e e3 TXD TXD 3 e o2 RXD TXD 3 e __e 2 RXD GND 5 e e 9 GND GND D e _e 9 GND DTR 4 e e 6 DSR DTR 4 6 DTR DSR 6 e _e 4 DTR DSR 6 4 DSR RTS e _e 8 Cis RTS T T RTS CTS 8 e __ e 7 RTS CTS 8 8 CTS D Sub 9 D Sub 9 D Sub 9 D Sub 9 202 Set ID Use this function to specify a set ID number Refer to Real Data Mapping gt p 207 OPTION e Language Language e Country UK e Disability Assistance VW e Power Indicator e Factory Reset e Set ID al e Mode Setting Home Use e IR Blaster Off Ze Select OPTION Select Set ID e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen OPTION e Language Language
103. ARE PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED LG ELECTRONICS EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO ANY CONTENT AND SERVICES EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OF SATISFACTORY QUALITY FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS LG DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY VALIDITY TIMELINESS LEGALITY OR COMPLETENESS OF ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE MADE AVAILABLE THROUGH THIS DEVICE AND DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE DEVICE OR SERVICES WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT OPERATION OF THE DEVICE OR SERVICES WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE SHALL LG BE LIABLE WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED IN OR ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE ACCESSED BY YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES Third party services may be changed suspended removed terminated or interrupted or access may be disabled at any time without notice and LG makes no representation or warranty that any content or service will remain available for any period of time Content and services are transmitted by third parties by means of networks and transmission facilities over which LG has no control LG may impose limits on the use of or access to certain servic
104. AUTION gt Do not step on the glass stand or subject it to any impact It may break causing possible injury from frag ments of glass or the TV may fall gt Do not drag the TV The floor or the product may be damaged m Image shown may differ from your TV Only 32 37 42 47 55LE5 32 37 42 47 55LE75 32 37 42 47 S55LE78 32 37 42 47 55LE79 42 47LX6 Intelligent Sensor Adjusts picture according to the surrounding conditions Remote Control Sensor SPEAKER Emitter Only 42 47LX6 It is the part equipped with the emitter exchanging signal with 3D glasses Please be careful not to block the screen with objects or people while watching a 3D Video Touch Button You can use the desired button function by touching OK INPUT el Power Standby Indicator og ve oF P Can be adjusted using the Power 7 j Indicator in the OPTION menu PROGRAMME VOLUME re POWER Only 42 47 55LE8 Intelligent Sensor Adjusts picture according to the surrounding conditions S O EEE re Remote Control Sensor SPEAKER Touch Button You can use the desired button function by touching VOLUME MENU POWER PROGRAMME i bos Power Standby Indicator Can be adjusted using the Power Indicator in the OPTION menu Only 32 37 42LE4 Power Standby Indicator Can be adjusted using the Power PROGRAMME Indicator in the OPTION menu Le paun em OK Intelligent Sensor Adjusts picture accordin
105. Card Slot aee CI Module to PCMCIA CARD This feature is not available in all countries Headphone Socket Plug the headphone into the headphone socket Audio Video Input Connect audio video output from an external device to these jacks A 19 NOILVdaVvdsdd E A 20 PREPARATION STAND INSTALLATION BACK COVER FOR m Image shown may differ from your TV WIRE ARRANG EMENT When assembling the desk type stand check 2 whether the bolt is fully tightened If not tightened Image shown may differ from your TV fully the product can tilt forward after the product installation If you tighten the bolt with excessive force the bolt can deviate from abrasion of the GD Connect the cables as necessary tightening part of the bolt To connect additional equipment see the Carefully place the TV screen side down on a cushioned surface to protect the screen from damage External Equipment Setup section Assemble the pare a the Stand Body with the Stand Base of the TV e Open the Cable Management Clip as shown Stand Base Cable Management Clip Fit the Cable Management Clip as shown Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in the back of the TV NOTE gt Do not use the Cable Management Clip to lift 5 Assemble the parts of the Stand Rear the TV g p Cover with the TV Only 32 4247L D7 e IV A o Sa _ If the TV is dropped you may be injured or the Stand Rear f pes y TV
106. Contact your ISP if you have problems maintaining a fast connection that is reliable or if you want to increase your connection speed Many ISPs offer a variety of broadband speed options gt To view the owner s manual that provided by the Content Provider visit our website at http www lg com gt To see the activation method of Orange or maxdome click the Orange maxdome in the CD manual Only Frence or German gt For service that requires log in join the applicable service on the website using the PC and log in through the TV to enjoy various additional functionalities gt When you set the city you want with Setup by pressing the red button the background of NetCast will be set to the weather of the selected city gt If there is no user action 2 minutes following freezing image or video on screen the screensaver will acti vate itself preventing fixed image remaining on screen Plasma TV only e Press the RED button to select Weather of area e Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing YOUTUBE YouTube is a video sharing website where users can upload view and share video clips YouTube Screen Components YouTube menu Videos list NOTE gt When you press the Q menu button while the Youtube video is playing in full mode you can set the video options ISVOLAN E 71 ISVOLAN E NETCAST YouTube Service menu Home You can watch the popular video in real time Featured The f
107. For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the sec tion is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 12 If the distribution and or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical d
108. IGITAL PLus Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the Audio Input Digital Audio output MPEG PCM Auto Speaker On Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital HE AAC PCM MPEG PCM Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Auto Speaker Off Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital HE AAC Dolby Digital e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen JOYLNOOD ADVNONVT 8 ANNOS E 161 TOYULNOO ADVNONVI 8 ANNOS E 162 SOUND amp LANGUAGE CONTROL AUDIO RESET Settings of the selected Sound Mode return to the default factory settings auno 2 y e coun iViode olandalrda e Infinite Sound Off e Treble e Bass W Reset e Digital Audio Out PCM e TV Speaker On e DTV Audio Setting Auto Select AUDIO Select Reset Select Yes Initialize the adjusted value F yi g u e Sound iViode Standard e Infinite Sound Off Q All audio settings will be resetted Continue e Digital Audio Out P No e TV Speaker e DTV Audio Setting Auto e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen AUDIO DESCRIPTION IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY This function is for the blind and provides explanatory audio describing the current situation in a TV programme in addition to the basic audio When Audio Description On is selected bas
109. IP address LGTV10 IP Mode IP Manual Setting Yul Signal Strength e iP Address BETET Mac Address 00 00 13 64 23 01 gt e Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 IP Address 10 19 152 115 Se Gateway Subnet Mask 255 255 254 0 e Gateway 192 168 0 1 LEi Gateway 10 19 152 1 e DNS Server 25501255000 Setting Test Close OK Previous e PC Settin Internet Pr fcol TCP IP of PC needs to be set manually IP address Subnet Mask and default Gateway can be set with your own discretion i e IP address 192 168 0 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 default Gateway 192 168 0 10 TV Setting Verify IP address and gateway of PC Setting Ad hoc network Insert the setting informatin into the device Network ID SSID LGTV10 Security Key 1111111111 Changing the setting information Next Setting Ad hoc network Insert the setting information into the device Network ID SSID LGTV10 Security Key 1111111111 Connecting the Ad hoc network Cancel e Example of the PC setting that supports a wireless network 1 Find a wireless network device in your PC 2 Select LGTV10 that appears in the list Select the same name as the network ID that appears on your TV screen Type 1111111111 in the Inserting the security key dialog Type the security key that appears on your TV screen oO Input Gateway address of PC to IP Address and IP Address of
110. L EQUIPMENT SETUP Simple setting WPS button mode If your access point or wireless router that supports PIN or WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup its available to use your access point or wireless router within 120 counts You do not need to know the access point name SSID Service Set Identifier and security code of your access point or wireless router Select the wireless network setting type Simple setting WPS button mode Select the wireless network setting type Setting from the AP list Simple setting WPS button mode t Setting Ad hoc network Next d Previous Press PBC mode button of AP and press Connect button Caution Check if PBC mode button is available for your AP Next 1 Repeat step 1 4 on P 24 Select Simple setting WPS button mode Select Connect 4 Repeat step 4 5 on P 20 Ad hoc Mode This is the method of communicating directly with the machine to communicate without AP This is the same as connecting two PCs with a cross cable Select the wireless network setting type Setting Ad hoc network Select the wireless network setting type Features using exiting network can be unavailable Do you z ist SENMON ONNE AE want to change network connection Simple setting WPS button mode Setting Ad hoc network Cancel Next Next Fa Previous Network Status Network Setting Adhoc network is connected Insert the
111. LX6 47 55LX9 50 60PX9 e If there are not any Service Operator that you want select Other Operators e If you select Other Operators or the selected country supports Other Operators only it may take some time to search all the channels or it may not search some of the channels If some of the channels do not appear follow the steps below 1 SETUP gt Auto Tuning gt Cable gt Setting 2 Switch Home Tuning from Off to On 3 Input additional values such as the frequency symbol rate modulation and network ID You can ask your cable service provider for the above information e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen m When you select the Quick Home Tuning Quick e Frequency kHz Start Frequency kHz 114000 362000 e Symbol rate kS s End Frequency kHz 862000 Network Auto i e Modulation 640QAM Network ID Setting OK Start Frequency kHz Close End Frequency kHz 862000 Reset Close Make appropriate adjustments Select Close 10 _ _ Select OK Wy 1 se Select Start 7 ka J Run Auto tuning Quick Start Frequency kHz 114000 End Frequency kHz 862000 Network Auto Cable The previous channel information will be updated during Auto Tuning Skip Scramble Programme J Automatic
112. MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 12 INNO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms To do so attach the following notices to the program It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found lt one line to give the program s name and a brief idea o
113. MI DVI IN 1 DVI HDMI DVI IN 2 HDMI DVI IN 3 or HDMI IN 4 Except for 32 37 42LD4 32 37 42 47 55LD6 32 42 47LD7 32 37 42LD8 terminal on the back of the TV and the HDMI output terminal of the Home Theater using HDMI cables 2 Connect the Digital Audio output terminal on the back of the TV and the Digital Audio input terminal of the Home Theater using optical cables Select Home Theater in the Speaker menu by pushing the SIMPLINK button gt When you select or operate a media device with home theater function the speaker automatically Home Theater switches to home theater speaker HT speaker NOTE gt Connect the HDMI DVI IN or HDMI IN terminal of the TV to the terminal HDMI terminal of the SIMPLINK device with the HDMI cable gt When you switch the Input source using the INPUT button on the remote control you can stop the opera tion of a device controlled by SIMPLINK JOYLNOO ANWVESDOdd AL ONIHOLVM 63 TOYLNOO ANWVESDOdd AL ONIHOLVM E 64 WATCHING TV PROGRAMME CONTROL SIMPLINK Functions Disc playback Control connected AV devices by pressing the lt gt OK gt m Il lt lt and gt gt buttons Direct Play After connecting AV devices to the TV you can directly control the devices and play media without additional set tings Select AV device Enables you to select one of the AV devices connected to the TV and operate it Power off all devices W
114. MY MEDIA Close Close Press OK to set programme settings ol Customer Support HE Simple Manual e Use the Check Update Version to update the Select Customer Support latest software on the Network server manually Select Software Update Save Select On or Off e f you select On a user confirm message box will be displayed to notify that new software is found e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen JOYLNOO ANWVESDOdd AL ONIHOLVM 5 49 TOYLNOOD ANWVESDOdd AL ONIHOLVM E WATCHING TV PROGRAMME CONTROL m When setting Software Update Occasionally a transmission of Download starts when Yes is TV is restarted when download updated digital software infor selected mation will result in the following Download progress status can menu on the TV screen is completed be checked from Software Update menu Software update is available Would you like to download now T Update is completed Rebooting now Software Update Software downloading progress Simple Update for current Ver 00 00 01 Ver 00 00 02 update stream 5 4 Check Update Version Anew software update is available at 00 00 0 00 00 Do you want to update the software when available Close Yes No Schedule Update for scheduled update stream When the Software Update me
115. Music List E Change Numbers __ Mark Mode Exit 01_a jpg 2008 12 10 1920 x 1080 479 KB The aspect ratio of a photo may change the size of the photo displayed on the screen in full size Press the EXIT button to move to the previous menu screen fx J9IA3d Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL i Select the target folder or drive e Use the P v button to navigation in the photo page Select the desired photos The selected photo is displayed in full size e Press the EXIT button to go back to Photo List e Press the BACK button to make Help OSD disappear 111 AJDIAAG Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL i 112 TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE Goes _ E 7 2008 12 10 Wa en 4 oe Select the 1920 x 1080 g 2 479 KB F i f T pay mii Peo Slideshow l BGM Rotate W 8 Option Hide or Exit e Use lt gt button to select the previous Slideshow gj Exit or next photo e Use lt gt button to select and control the menu on the full sized screen gt Slideshow When no picture is selected all photos in the cur rent folder are displayed during slide show If some photos are selected those photos are displayed in a slide show Set the time interval of the slide show in Option gt BGM Background Music Listen to music while viewing photos in full size m Set the BGM device and album in Options before using this function You can adjust Option by Q MENU or MENU button on the remote con
116. N IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY S NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE LAW PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THIS EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU XIGNAddV 7 N 23 APPENDIX 10 U S GOVERNMENT END USERS The Covered Code is a commercial item as that term is defined in 48 C F R 2 101 Oct 1995 consisting of commercial computer software and commercial computer software documentation as such terms are used in 48 C F R 12 212 Sept 1995 Consistent with 48 C F R 12 212 and 48 C F R 227 7202 1 through 227 7202 4 June 1995 all U S Government End Users acquire Covered Code with only those rights set forth herein 11 MISCELLANEOUS This License represents the complete agreement concerning subject matter hereof If any provision of this License is held to be unenforceable such provision shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to make it enforceable This License shall be governed by California law provisions except to the extent applicable law if any provides otherwise excluding its conflict of law provisions With respect to disputes in which at least one party is a citizen of or an entity chartered or registered to do business in the United States of A
117. N ZC 50PK780 ZC 50PK790 ZC 1184 0 mm x 801 0 mm x 294 5 mm 60PK5 60PK590 ZE 1392 0 mm x 915 0 mm x 384 0 mm 1392 0 mm x 852 0 mm x 55 3 mm 45 9 kg 41 4 kg 60PK7 60PK760 ZC 6 0PK760N ZC 60PK780 ZC 60PK790 ZC 1402 8 mm x 934 3 mm x 384 0 mm 0 C to 40 C Less than 80 20 C to 60 C Less than 85 Refer to p 96 to 97 m The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement m For the power supply and power consumption refer to the label attached to the product XIGNAddV 7 199 XIGNAddV i 200 APPENDIX S0PK9 60PK9 pocteccsccscssccccscesccssccsscosssssccsccssccsscssssssccssscesssccescosesssscscsseccssccsessascscsssstcscessccessssccsscssscsccsscssscoscssesosccescsssscssccscssssotssccssasossesssscsscssessssossassssased MODELS 50PK950 ZA 50PK960 ZA 60PK950 ZA 60PK960 ZA 50PK950N ZA 50PK980 ZA 60PK950N ZA 60PK980 ZA 50PK990 ZA 60PK990 ZA Dimensions Width x Height x Depth with stand 1190 0 mm x 804 5 mm x 294 5 mm 1408 8 mm x 937 9 mm x 384 0 mm without stand with stand without stand Weight MODELS 50PX960 ZA 50PX950N ZA 60PX960 ZA 60PX950N ZA 50PX980 ZA 50PX990 ZA 60PX980 ZA 60PX990 ZA Dimensions with stand 1190 0 mm x 804 5 mm x 294 5 mm 1408 8 mm x 937 9 mm x 384 0 mm Width x Height x Depth without stand with stand Weight eig without stand CI Module Size Width x Height x Depth Ope
118. NG The Off time function automatically switches the TV to standby at a preset time Two hours after the TV is switched on by the on time function it will automatically switch back to stand by mode unless a button has been pressed The Off time function overrides the On time function if both are set to the same time The TV must be in standby mode for the On time to work TIME D e Clock TIME b e Clock 1 Mar 2007 16 09 a e Off Time e On Time La e Off Time Off Bl e On Time Off Repeat Hour z e Sleep Timer Off E e Sleep Timer Minute Input Antenna Programme Volume e To cancel On Off Time function select Off e For On Time function only Select TIME Select Off Time or On Time A Select Input rey LZS aay ae 2 OK Select Repeat Select the input source aay i gt Select Off Once Daily Mon Fri e gt Set the programme Mon Sat Sat Sun or Sun orma d gt Sarina hour e gt Adjust volume level at switch on e gt Set the minutes w g e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen SLEEP TIMER SETTING You do not have to remember to switch the TV off before you go to sleep The sleep timer automatically switches the TV to standby after the preset time has elapsed Select Sleep Timer Select Off 10 20 30 60 90 120
119. NOTE The supplied Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials CD ROM is a customized software edition only for sharing files and folders to this TV The supplied Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials software does not support following functions Transcoding Remote UI TV control Internet services and Apple iTunes This manual explains operations with the English version of Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials as examples Follow the explanation referring to the actual operations of your language version gt f there are too many folders and files in one folder it may not operate properly gt For the DLNA option use the Nero MediaHome programme that is provided with the TV However we cannot guarantee that third party programmes will work perfectly gt You can select a channel while viewing the small preview channel list on your TV screen Check your network settings when the DLNA option does not work properly If there is an abnormal operation or an error occurs in Nero Media Home the DLNA option may not work properly In this case exit Nero Media Home and restart the programme You can down load the latest version of Nero Media Home by clicking the question mark at the bottom left of the programme When the network is unstable the device may be slower or may need to load during playback When playing a video in DLNA mode the Multi Audio and Closed Caption features are not supported When T Full Screen in DLNA mode the ratio of the outp
120. NSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 16 INNO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries If you develop a new library and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change You can do so by permitting redistribution und
121. O e Sound Mode i Off Off 3 0 E Standard e Infinite Sound Off e Treble 50 e Bass 50 e Reset Select AUDIO Select Balance Make desired adjustment 2 AUDIO e Auto Volume Off Of 3 e Clear Voice II e Balance 0 lt gt Close e Balance e Sound Mode Standard e Infinite Sou e Treble e Bass Reset e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen TV SPEAKERS ON OFF SETUP You can adjust the TV internal speaker status In AV COMPONENT RGB and HDMI1 with HDMI to DVI cable the TV speaker can be operational even when there is no video signal If you wish to use an external Hi Fi system turn off the TV s internal speakers auno gt OUUTIO IVIOUC OlallGalQ e Infinite Sound Off e Treble 50 E e Bass 50 E e Reset e Digital Audio Out PCM 1V Speaker On t e DTV Audio Setting Auto PO Select AUDIO Select TV Speaker S Select On or Off Oldi l d U e Infinite Sound Off e Treble e Bass 50 e Reset PCM f DTV Audio Setting Auto e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen NOTE gt When the TV speaker is turned off while the Simplink home theater is operating the s
122. Operators of Netherlands Except for 42 47LX6 47 55LX9 50 60PX9 e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen The following values are needed in order to search all available programmes quickly and correctly The commonly used values are provided as default However for correct settings please inquire of the cable service provider When running Auto Tuning in DVB cable mode selecting Full will search through all frequencies to find available channels In the case when the programme is not searched by selecting the Default perform the searching by selecting the Full However in the case when the programme is searched by selecting the Full the Auto Tuning time can be taken too much Frequency Enter a user defined frequency Symbol rate Enter a user defined symbol rate Symbol rate Speed at which a device such as modem sends symbols to a channel Modulation Enter a user defined modulation Modulation Loading of audio or video signals onto carrier Network ID Unique identifier allocated for each user Start Frequency Enter a user defined start frequency range End Frequency Enter a user defined end frequency range JOYLNOO ANWVESDOdd AL ONIHOLVM N 37 TOYLNOOD ANWVESDOdd AL ONIHOLVM E 38 WATCHING TV PROGRAMME CONTROL CABLE DTV SETTING IN CABLE MODE ONLY The range that a user can select from the Ser
123. Option menu m In UK In digital mode T OPT button does not work Text Option a Index Select the each index page Time a Time When viewing a TV programme select this menu to display the time at the top right Close hand corner of the screen In the teletext mode press this button to select a sub page number The sub page number is displayed at the bottom of the screen To hold or change the sub page press the RED GREEN lt gt or NUMBER buttons m Hold Stops the automatic page change which will occur if a teletext page consists of 2 or more sub pages The number of sub pages and the sub page displayed is usually shown on the screen below the time When this menu is selected the stop symbol is displayed at the top left hand corner of the screen and the automatic page change is inactive m Reveal Select this menu to display concealed information such as solutions to riddles or puzzles Update Displays the TV picture on the screen while waiting for a new teletext page The display will appear at the top left hand corner of the screen When the updated page is available then display will change to the page number Select this menu again to view the updated teletext page Uf Hee gis E 179 1X31313L WLSIC i 00 DIGITAL TELETEXT This function works in UK Ireland only The TV gives you access to digital teletext which is greatly improved in various aspects such as text graphics e
124. PC to Gateway and select OK i e IP address 192 168 0 10 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 default Gateway 192 168 0 1 1 Repeat step 1 3 on P 24 eS Select Setting Ad hoc network F Select OK Select Connect to connect Ad hoc network You can see the Network ID and Security Key on your TV screen Enter this Network ID and Security Key to your device lf a network may not operate change the setting information using the RED button Insert the IP address Network setting is completed Select Close dNLAS LNAWdINOA WNYsALXS f 27 dNLAS LNAWdINOA WNYsALXS i EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP Network Status Network Status ts NETWORK e Network Setting Wired e Network Status Internet is connected e Legal Notice Network connecting Network Setting Select the wireless network setting type Select the wireless network setting type Select the IP setting mode Setting from the AP list IP Mode lt IP Auto Setting gt Simple setting WPS button mode e IP Address 209 a ADD 00 Setting Ad hoc network e Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Next e Gateway Zoo a S ed a O da Previous Exit e DNS Server 255255 0 Wireless Connection Wired Connection Select NETWORK m Setting Return to the network setting menu or wireless network setting type menu S Select Network Status m Test Test the current network status SANNE after setting the network m Close
125. PL NPL or any confusingly similar phrase do not appear in your license except to note that your license differs from this License and b otherwise make it clear that Your ver sion of the license contains terms which differ from the Mozilla Public License and Netscape Public License Filling in the name of the Initial Developer Original Code or Contributor in the notice described in Exhibit A shall not of themselves be deemed to be modifications of this License 7 DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY COVERED CODE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS LICENSE ONAN AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES THAT THE COVERED CODE IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON INFRINGING THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE COVERED CODE IS WITH YOU SHOULD ANY COVERED CODE PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT YOU NOT THE INITIAL DEVELOPER OR ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE NO USE OF ANY COVERED CODE IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER 8 TERMINATION 8 1 This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate automatically if You fail to comply with terms here in and fail to cure such breach within 30 days of becoming aware of the breach All sublicenses to the Covered Code which are properly granted shall
126. Return to the previous menu Check the network status WATCHING TV PROGRAMME CONTROL TURNING ON THE TV When your TV is turned on you will be able to use its features D Firstly connect the power cord correctly At this stage the TV switches to standby mode D In standby mode to turn TV on press the 1 INPUT or P v button on the TV or press the POWER INPUT P or NUMBER button on the remote control and the TV will switch on INITIALIZING SETUP Gp If the OSD On Screen Display is displayed on the screen after turning on the TV you can adjust the Language Mode Setting Power Indicator When you select Home Use from Mode Setting Only LED LCD TV models Country Except for 32 37 42LE49 32 37 42 47 55LE59 42 47LE7390 32 37 42 47 55LE79 42 47 55LE89 32 37 42LD49 32 37 42 47 55LD69 32 42 47LD79 32 37 42LD89 42 47LX69 50 60PK59 50 60PK79 50 60PK99 50 60PX99 or Time Zone When Russia is selected for Country or Set Password When France is selected for Country Auto Tuning Note a lf you close without completing the initial setting the Initial Setting menu can be displayed again b Press the BACK button to change the current OSD to the previous OSD c For those countries without confirmed DTV broadcasting standards some DTV features might not work depending on the DTV broadcasting environment d Home Use mode is the optimal setting for home environments and is
127. System On e If you wish to keep on auto tuning select Start using Select Auto Tuning the Y button Then press the OK button Otherwise select Close e Automatic Numbering Decide whether to use the programme Select Antenna numbers as sent by broadcasting stations for tuning e SECAM L Search Except for 32 37 42LE49 A 32 37 42 47 55LE59 42 47LE7390 32 37 42 147 55LE79 O Select Start 42147 155LE89 32 37 42LD49 32 37 42 47 55LD69 32 42 47LD79 32 37 42LD89 42 47LX69 50 60PK59 50 60PK79 50 60PK99 50 60PX99 Run Auto tuning When select Italy in the County menu If the pop up is displayed when the conflicted programme after Auto Tuning select a broadcaster for Conflicting programme number to solve e In the following country DVB cable can be used Germany Netherlands Sweden Switzerland Denmark Austria Finland Norway Slovenia Hungary Ukraine Except for 42 47LX6 47 55LX9 50 60PX9 The supported country can be added e In the following country Digital TV can not be used Slovakia Bosnia Serbia Bulgaria Albania Kazakhstan e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen JOYLNOO ANWVESDOdd AL ONIHOLVM N 33 TOYLNOO ANWVESDOdd AL ONIHOLVM E WATCHING TV PROGRAMME CONTROL If you want to select the Cable SETUP O o Auto Tuning Please select your TV Connection
128. T 2GOOG SAVING Mon 5m me VOLUME UP DOWN MARK FAV CHAR NUM Adjusts the volume Select the input to apply the Picture Wizard settings Check and un check programmes in the USB menu NOILVaVvdsdd 7 Displays the selected favourite programme Shifts the Character or Number for NetCast menu 3D Use this to view 3D video gt p 88 EZA gt B p sali DELETE Deletes the entered character when entering the a re character on the screen keyboard G C Car v de UR SELECT MUTE Programme UP DOWN PAGE UP DOWN SIMPLINK MY MEDIA Menu control buttons Switches the sound on or off Selects a programme Move from one full set of screen information to the next one Controls SIMPLINK or MY MEDIA menu Photo List Music List and Movie List Installing Batteries m Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install the batteries matching correct polarity with with m Install two 1 5 V AAA batteries Do not mix old or used batter ies with new ones m Close cover m To remove the batteries perform the installation actions in reverse ine ag CS A 35 NOILVdaVvdsdd E A 360 PREPARATION LED LCD TV MODELS 42 47LE73 ACCESSORIES Ensure that the following accessories are included with your TV If an accessory is missing please contact the dealer where you purchased the TV m Image shown may differ from your TV a a
129. TURE Select Screen Select Position Size or Phase Make appropriate adjustments e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen NETWORK SETUP Wired Network Connection This TV can be connected to a local area network LAN via the LAN port After making the physical connection the TV needs to be set up for network communication Broadband Modem isl Router Broadband Modem Broadband Service La Broadband Service D Connect the LAN port of the Modem or Router to the LAN port on the TV After connecting the LAN port use the NetCast menu For more information about NETCAST setup and trouble shooting visit http Igknowledgebase com Search for NetCast 4 CAUTION gt Do not connect a modular phone cable to the LAN port gt Since there are various connection methods please follow the specifications of your telecommunication carrier or internet service provider dNLAS LNAWdINOA WNYsSLXS f 19 dNLAS LNAWdINOA WNYsALXS i 20 EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP Wired Network Setup If wired and wireless networks are both available wired is the preferred metho d After making a physical connection a small number of home networks may require the TV network settings to be adjusted For detail information contact your internet provider or router manual If you already set NETWORK b Network Type Net
130. TV to enjoy the best 3D view To select more comfortable view for or Ba you change to left right image of slasses with Ml button ora I 3D effect setting 10 EEEE E Left Right image change ORON e In case of this OSD On Screen Display you can adjust the 3D End 3Dvideo effect setting with using t button gt Select Left Right or Right Left OK or OK a ope select the screen with 3D video with better visibility E Setting Left Right v Left Right 3 3D effect 10 lt EE 3D mode setting E Right Left zp z PJ Lefvright End 3D video End 3D video End 3D video o xit e Press the 3D button to return to normal TV viewing ONOTE gt If you select 3D mode Power indicator is turned off automatically LCD TV LED LCD TV only gt While watching 3D imaging you cannot adjust video audio settings using the menu LCD TV LED LCD TV only gt Some menus may not work while watching the TV in 3D You can only choose Standard Cinema Game with the AV MODE button on remote control AV Mode is set as Standard while playing in 3D LCD TV LED LCD TV only If used 3D effect on the 2D source 3D may not work The 3D imaging mode is disabled automatically when switching DTV channels The screen may not be displayed properly if you view 2D DTV images in 3D imaging mode 3D effect can be seen when 3D Mode is selected appropriately for the 3D input sig
131. W IWLISIC NI j 3dIN9 AWNWVYDONd JINO H19373 9d3 131 JQOW IWLISIC NI p 3dIN9 AWNVYDONd DINOYLO3AT14 9d3 132 EPG ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE Button Function in Date Change Mode Programme That 70s show W DTV 1 YLE TV ALL a Gn 5 YLE FST You Call The Hits Guide 25 Nov 2008 10 05 1 25 Nov 2008 09 45 10 15 Antigues Roadshow Kungskonsumente Mint Extra The Drum 6 CNN Fashion Essentials 8 YLE24 Button Function in Extended Description Box E T T n n otsikoissa Date Change Date Exit DTV 1 YLE TV1 25 25 Nov 2008 10 05 ia World Touring Car Chanpionship ue 25 Nov 2008 10 05 12 40 Fia Champion Miss Gotto s Haunted house Cry of The Swamp Miss Gotto s Haunted house Cry of The Swamp Miss Gotto s Haunted house Cry of The Swamp Miss Gotto s Haunted house Cry of The Swamp Miss Gotto s Haunted house Cry of The Swamp Miss Gotto s Haunted house Cry of The Swamp Button Function in Record Remind Setting Mode Sets a start or end time programme for recording and sets a start time programme for the reminder with the end time grayed out This function is available only when recording equipment that use pin8 recording signalling has been connected to the TV OUT AV1 terminal using a SCART cable Recording function is only supported in the Digital mode and not in the Analogue mode Manual Timer Switch off Manual Timer
132. XS i EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP SUPPORTED DISPLAY RESOLUTION Plasma TV Models RGB PC HDMI DVI PC mode HDMI DVI DTV mode Horizontal i Resolution ete Fran eve ET Frequency see ees Le 720x400 31 468 70 08 1 889 59 04 640x480 31 469 59 94 31 5 60 ee aaa lca EE Ue bs kre a a leat DE oe anes 14 96 nr ree aaa oe al j 50 7280x1028 63 981 e002 es aaa ial 1920x1080 66 587 59 93 33 175 60 le RGB PC 28 125 50 1920x1080 HDMI PC aa Di p l P l Ee a 1920x1080 33 716 29 976 33 75 30 00 56 25 50 67 43 59 94 67 5 60 LCD TV Models LED LCD TV Models RGB PC HDMI DVI PC mode HDMI DVI DTV mode Horizontal i Resolution Freg Hates Sees Seen aT Frequency Seer x 720x400 31468 7008 31 489 59 94 640x480 31 469 59 94 315 60 Wee a ee a aaa ers i gt in ee a ee o S eer 14 96 ney late o n te y2eox1024 63981 G0 _ lc lr ay 1920x1080 aona 59 93 3375 60 p RGB PC 28 125 50 1920x1080 HDMI PC mee ina se pr e Oo 1920x1080 33 716 29 976 33 75 30 00 56 25 50 67 43 59 94 67 5 60 dNLAS LNAWdINOA T1YN H31X4 f 13 dNLAS LNAWdINOA WNYsALXS i 14 NOTE gt Avoid keeping a fixed image on the set s screen for prolonged periods of time The fixed image may become permanently imprinted on the screen use a screen saver when possible gt There may be interference relating to resolution vertical pattern contrast or brightness in PC mode Change the PC mode to another resolution or change the
133. XT TOP TEXT The user guide displays four fields red green yellow and blue at the bottom of the screen The yellow field denotes the next group and the blue field indicates the next block m Block group page selection With the blue button you can progress from block to block Use the yellow button to proceed to the next group with automatic overflow to the next block With the green button you can proceed to the next existing page with automatic overflow to the next group Alternatively the P button can be used The red button returns to the previous selection Alternatively the P v button can be used Direct page selection As with SIMPLE teletext mode you can select a page by entering it as a three digit number using the NUMBER buttons in TOP mode FASTEXT The teletext pages are colour coded along the bottom of the screen and are selected by pressing the corresponding coloured button Page selection Press the T OPT button and then use button to select Eilmenu Display the index page You can select the pages which are colour coded along the bottom line with corresponding coloured buttons AS with SIMPLE teletext mode you can select a page by entering its three digit page number with the NUMBER buttons in FASTEXT mode The P v button can be used to select the preceding or following page SPECIAL TELETEXT FUNCTIONS m Press the T OPT button and then use button to select the Text
134. You cannot select the Option in 3D imaging mode Only 42 47LX6 47 55LX9 gt If you want to listen to BGM background music while viewing mpo image files play a jpg file and set the BGM folder in Option Set Photo View Then you can select and listen to BGM when viewing mpo files Only 42 47LX6 47 55LXQ JDIAAG Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL p 113 AJDIAAG Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL i 114 TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE m When you select the Set Photo View Set Photo View Slide Speed a Fast gt BGM Drivet e Repeat e Random m When you select the Set Video m Image shown may differ from your TV LCD TV LED LCD TV only Set Video Picture Mode e Backlight e Contrast e Brightness e Colour 60 e Dynamic Contrast e Edge Enhancer e Noise Reduction TruMotion I Picture Reset a Standard D DE DE DE lt Medium lt High lt Medium lt Low gt J Previous PLASMA TV Only Set Video Picture Mode e Contrast e Brightness 50 e Sharpness 50 e Colour 60 e Tint 0 colourtemnp Me WIDNA e Dynamic Contrast I Picture Reset J Previous JDIAAG Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL i 115 AJDIAAG Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL i 116 TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE m When you select the Set Audio Set Audio Sound Mode Auto Volume Clear Voice II Balance Ja Previous Make appropriate adjustments Refer to p 154 to 158 S
135. Yoyodyne Inc hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library Frob a library for tweaking knobs written by James Random Hacker XIGNAddV 7 lt signature of Ty Coon gt 1 April 1990 Ty Coon President of Vice N 19 XIGNAddV i 220 APPENDIX MOZILLA PUBLIC LICENSE Version 1 1 1 Definitions 1 0 1 Commercial Use means distribution or otherwise making the Covered Code available to a third party 1 1 Contributor means each entity that creates or contributes to the creation of Modifications 1 2 Contributor Version means the combination of the Original Code prior Modifications used by a Contributor and the Modifications made by that particular Contributor 1 3 Covered Code means the Original Code or Modifications or the combination of the Original Code and Modifications in each case including portions thereof 1 4 Electronic Distribution Mechanism means a mechanism generally accepted in the software development com munity for the electronic transfer of data 1 5 Executable means Covered Code in any form other than Source Code 1 6 Initial Developer means the individual or entity identified as the Initial Developer in the Source Code notice required by Exhibit A 1 7 Larger Work means a work which combines Covered Code or portions thereof with code not governed by the terms of this License 1 8 License means this document 1 8 1 Licensable means having the right to grant
136. a work based on the Program independent of having been made by running the Program Whether that is true depends on what the Program does XIGNAddV 7 N 11 XIGNAddV i 212 APPENDIX 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium pro vided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Program and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change b You must cause any work that you distribute or publish that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License c If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run you mus
137. above you may also combine or link a work that uses the Library with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library and distribute that work under terms of your choice provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modi fications You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License You must supply a copy of this License If the work during execution displays copy right notices you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License Also you must do one of these things a Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above and if the work is an executable linked with the Library with the complete machine readable work that uses the Library as object code and or source code so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions b Use a suitable shared library mechanism for
138. acter when entering the character on the screen keyboard MUTE Switches the sound on or off Programme Selects a programme UP DOWN PAGE UP Move from one full set of screen information to the DOWN next one SIMPLINK Controls SIMPLINK or MY MEDIA menu Photo List MY MEDIA Music List and Movie List Menu control buttons Installing Batteries m Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install the batteries matching correct polarity with with m Install two 1 5 V AAA batteries Do not mix old or used batter ies with new ones m Close cover m To remove the batteries perform the installation actions in reverse LED LCD TV MODELS 47 55LX9 ACCESSORIES Ensure that the following accessories are included with your TV If an accessory is missing please contact the dealer where you purchased the TV m Image shown may differ from your TV Owner s Manual i gt a z 4 X 2 Owner s Manual Batteries Remote Control AAA This item is not included for all models Lightly wipe any stains or fingerprints on the surface A N of the TV with the polish ing cloth 7 Polishing Cloth Do a nee T _ Ferrite Core Polishing cloth for force This may cause Nero MediaHome This item is not included use on the screen scratching or discoloura 4 Essentials CD for all models tion M4x12 M4x22 Cable Holder Component gender cable Stand Rear Bolts for stand assembly AV
139. age shown may differ from your TV Dynamic Contrast PICTURE Ed PICTURE y lt Medium gt mE Dynamic Colour Medium narpness onarpn Dynamic Contrast lt High gt e Colour GCO EE es Clear White Off l e Colour Dynamic Colour High F O e Tint 0 e Tint Skin Colour 0 Noise Reduct C5 j e Colour Temp 0 gt i oi oe Ra a ya eduction Medium 9 7 g 3 m Gamma Medium e Advanced Control 7 i Selita Digital Noise Reduction Medium iv e Picture Reset rey A Black Level Auto MO amma i p e TruMotion Oli We TruMotion ua Film Mode E be Black Level Auto creen e Screen Colour Gamut Eye Care Low v Close LCD TV LED LCD TV only Plasma TV only Select PICTURE Select Advanced Control Select your desired Source Dynamic Contrast Dynamic Colour Clear White LCD TV LED LCD TV only Skin Colour LCD TV LED LCD TV only Noise Reduction Digital Noise Reduction LCD TV LED LCD TV only Gamma Black Level Eye Care LCD TV LED LCD TV only Real Cinema LCD TV LED LCD TV only Film Mode Plasma TV only Colour Gamut Edge Enhancer Plasma TV only or xvYCC Refer to p 145 to 146 A Make appropriate adjustments TOYLNOO 3HNL ld E e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen 143 PICTURE CONTROL EXPERT PICTURE CONTROL By segmenting
140. always outputted If MPEG is not supported another audio type is set in that order e Refer to p 167 to 168 Audio Language Selection SELECTING DIGITAL AUDIO OUT This function allows you to select your preferred Digital Audio Output When Dolby Digital is available selecting Auto in the Digital Audio Out menu will set SPDIF Sony Philips Digital InterFace output to Dolby Digital If Auto is selected in the digital audio out menu when Dolby Digital is not available SPDIF output will be PCM Pulse code modulation Even if both Dolby Digital and Audio language have been set in a channel which broadcast Dolby Digital Audio only Dolby Digital will be played e Digital Audio Out e TV Speaker gt On Lae e DTV Audio Setting Auto auno AUDIO 5 oOUUTIO IVIOUC Oldil dl e cound Mode olaldGald Ld e Infinite Sound Off e Infinite Sound Off e Treble 50 E e Treble e Bass 50 E a o ey i Bass ese e Reset e Digital Audio Out PCM e TV Speaker gt On cS e DTV Audio Setting Auto double D symbol are trademarks Select Digital Audio Out of Dolby Laboratories a e There is a possibility that when HDMI mode some DVD players do not make SPDIF sound Select Auto or PCM At that time set the output of the digital audio of the DVD player to PCM In HDMI Dolby Digital Plus is not supported Select AUDIO 1 DOLBY Manufactured under license from D
141. am is linked with a library whether statically or using a shared library the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work a derivative of the original library The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library We call this license the Lesser General Public License because it does Less to protect the user s freedom than the ordinary General Public License It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non free programs These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries However the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances For example on rare occasions there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library so that it becomes a de facto standard To achieve this non free programs must be allowed to use the library A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non free libraries In this case there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only so we use the Lesser General Public License In other cases permission to use a particular library in non free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software For example permission to use
142. anually to the left or right direction by 20 _ degrees to suit your viewing position Assemble the parts of the Stand Rear Cover with the TV Stand Rear Cover A 30 KENSINGTON SECURITY SYSTEM m This feature is not available for all models m Image shown may differ from your TV The TV is equipped with a Kensington Security System connector on the back panel Connect ae Kensington Security System cable as shown elow For the detailed installation and use of the Kensington Security System refer to the user s guide provided with the Kensington Security system For further information contact http www kens ington com the internet homepage of the Kensington company Kensington sells security systems for expensive electronic equipment such as note book PCs and LCD projectors NOTE gt The Kensington Security System is an optional accessory gt If the TV feels cold to the touch there may be a small flicker when it is turned on This is normal there is nothing wrong with TV gt Some minute dot defects may be visible on the screen appearing as tiny red green or blue spots However they have no adverse effect on the monitor s performance gt Avoid touching the LCD screen or holding your finger s against it for long periods of time Doing so may produce some temporary distortion effects on the screen CAREFUL INSTALLATION ADVICE m You should purchase necessary com
143. ature Environment condition Operating Humidity Storage Temperature 20 C to 60 C Storage Humidity Less than 85 Supported movie files Refer to p 96 to 97 m The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement XIGNAddV 7 197 XIGNAddV i 198 APPENDIX WO DH RS Dimensions Width x Height x Depth with stand without stand with stand Weight A without stand Power requirement Power Consumption CI Module Size Width x Height x Depth Operating Temperature Environment condition Operating Humidity Storage Temperature Storage Humidity Supported movie files 42LD840 ZA 42LD840N ZA 42LD880 ZA 42LD890 ZA 0 C to 40 C Less than 80 20 C to 60 C Less than 85 Refer to p 96 to 97 m The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement WO D HES Dimensions Width x Height x Depth with stand without stand with stand Weight te without stand V L B al Es Dimensions with stand Width x Height x Depth without stand with stand Weight eig without stand CI Module Size Width x Height x Depth Operating Temperature Environment condition Operating Humidity Storage Temperature Storage Humidity Supported movie files SOPK5 50PK590 ZE 1171 4 mm x 786 2 mm x 309 7 mm 1171 4 mm x 724 4 mm x 55 3 mm 31 0 kg 28 6 kg 50PK7 50PK760 ZC 50PK760
144. ause II button while playing the file the playback will be paused When you press the Pause II button again while the playback is paused it will resume the playback When playing When you press the REW lt lt button the previous music file will be played When you press the FF gt button the next music file will be played Start playing the selected music files and then move to the Photo List Press the ENERGY SAVING button repeatedly to change the brightness of your screen Refer to p 138 Only Off Screen Off operates from the Movie List Photo List Music List LCD TV LED LCD TV only When you press the Back button while the music is playing the music player currently playing will be hidden and only the music list will be displayed When you press the Exit button while the Music player is displayed only the music will be stopped and the player will not return to normal TV viewing When you press the Exit button while the music is stopped or while the music player is hidden the player will return to normal TV viewing AJDIAAG Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL i When using the or button during playback a cursor indicating the position can be played 122 m When you select the Set Audio Play Set Audio Play Repeat a On gt Random lt Off gt e Previous 0S FS sete Repeat or Random Make appropriate adjustments JDIAAG Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL i 123 JDIAAG Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL i 124
145. ay take some time to view high resolution images in full screen Only 42 47LX6 47 55LX9 50 60PX9 File Item Profile Extensions SOFO baseline SOF1 Extend Sequential supproted file format SOF2 Progressive be _ _ sieaae A AE Min 64 x 64 TE A AEE asec saddes sacs acve danse A aesvean tases sbeatete eau steawanedseaseestseees 3 photo size Max Normal Type 15360 W x 8640 H Progressive Type 1920 W x 1440 H COUR ECO eC Oe eee OOOO eee ee errr reer re reer rec ee reer rec rer rer rer rere reer r errr rere e reer err eres cere cre rrr rer re reer rr rer ee rec errr errr e errr rece errr rarer res rer rere c reece crete cre reece cree rece e rrr rer verre rere reer errr reece errr rer rere errr rer re rer rer errr errr rere etree ree rrr rer terre rrr rer rere rer rer reir sy EPEa e ic aa O ee mo 48 5 38 72 PHON site 2 2 048 x 1 536 3 2 size 3 648 x 2 432 Screen Components You can also adjust USB in the INPUT menu 2A A AZ Select MY MEDIA Select Photo List Moves to upper level folder Current page Total pages 84 Photo List Corresponding buttons on the USB1 External remote control Contents under the folder focused on Current page total pages of ae contents under the folder focused on JDIAAG Od dO ASN Y ASN OL i 1
146. cally POP UP MENU will not be displayed while the OSD including Menu EPG or Schedule list is activat ed or while the Bluetooth Headset is connected When the Pop Up menu appears you can select Music List Photo List or Movie List in the MY MEDIA menu In USB device you can not add a new folder or delete the existing folder After choosing the desired type of media choose a device to open files from The options are USB device or DLNA 1 Connect the USB device to the USB IN 1 or USB IN 2 jack on the TV e Only photo JPEG MPO Only 42 47LX6 47 55LX9 50 60PX9 music MP3 and movie DAT MPG MPEG VOB AVI DIVX MP4 MKV TS TRP TP ASF WMV are supported When removing the USB device Select the USB Device menu before removing the USB device Select Movie List Photo List or MENU Select USB Device Music List Select Eject MY MEDIA w feat J NOTE m Image shown may differ from your TV gt In order to avoid losing the USB memory stick use the USB connector sold separately to fix OK TEENE eslec gave the USB memory stick to the USB connector holder of the TV Plasma TV only VA Search other network device ee r eai holder Please select the device ff l p Input vori j oe ra f USB Connector sold separately Fix the one end of the USB connector to the USB memory stick and the other end to the USB connector holder USB Label
147. can Original Full Wide 4 3 14 9 Zoom and Cinema Zoom If a fixed image is displayed on the screen for a long time that fixed image may become imprinted on the screen and remain visible You can adjust the enlarge proportion using button This function works in the following signal l e You can also adjust Aspect Ratio in the Select Aspect Ratio PICTURE menu e For Zoom Setting select 14 9 Zoom and Select the desired picture format Cinema Zoom in Ratio Menu After com Cy pleting Zoom Setting the display goes back to Q Menu e 16 9 e Original The following selection will allow you to adjust the pic When your TV receives a wide screen signal it will auto ture horizontally in linear proportion to fill the entire matically change to the picture format broadcast screen useful for viewing 4 3 formatted DVDs Just Scan Full Wide Following Selection will lead to you view the 2 picture of best quality without loss of original picture in high resolution image Note If there is noise in original Picture You can see the noise at the edge When TV receives the wide screen signal it will lead you to adjust the picture horizontally or vertically in a linear proportion to fill the entire screen fully 4 3 and 14 9 video is supported in full screen with out any video distortion through DTV input a Pyes TOHLNOO 3HNL ld E 135 JOYLNOO 3HNL ld S 136 PICTURE CONTROL 4 3
148. categories Expert1 and Expert2 provide more categories which users can set as they see fit offering the optimal picture quality for users This may also be used to help a professional optimize the TV performance using specific videos Image shown may differ from your TV CA PICTURE e Aspect Ratio 16 9 e Picture Wizard La PICTURE Dynamic Contrast a Medium FS Dynamic Contrast gt of gt Noise Reduction Medium Noise Reduction O Digital Noise Reduction Medium Gamma Medium O Intelligent Sensor e e Energy Saving n Oi Black Level Auto Black Level Auto e Picture Mode EA Exper C Standard Real Cinema Film Mode of i si Tap pjq Colour Gamut Colour Gamut Standard j E p o TruMotion 7 Edge Enhancer Edge Enhancer O ETA e Screen xvYCC xvYCC Auto A S E EA Expert2 Expert Pattern Expert Pattern O v LCD TV LED LCD TV only Plasma TV only Select PICTURE Select Picture Mode Select EA Expert1 or Ha Expert2 Select Expert Control Select your desired Source 6 e gt Make appropriate adjustments e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen 144 This feature is not available for all models Selle remit m Adjusts the contrast to keep it at the best level according to the brightness of Off Low Medium LCD ai TVILED LCD TV only
149. cccccccseeecssecceeeseueessseeeaeeens 73 9 02 cfs ee ee eee ae ee ees eee eee eee 14 TO USE THE BLUETOOTH 3 Ei 0 8 9 aaeeneen ee eene ene er eran nee inane en ore es 76 Setting the Bluetootn cceccccseeceesesseeeeeeees 77 Bluetooth headset ccccccsseccsseeeeeeseeeesees 78 Remove the bluetooth device cccecceeee 82 My Bluetooth Information cccceeeseeeeeees 83 Receiving photos from external Bluetooth device 84 Listening to the Musics from external Bluetooth CE VICG sienna EEE EAER 85 3D IMAGING 3D TECHNOLOGY orunkun eena eis 86 Viewing 3D TAIN saseciet seentenseenceeendiciatuoaseuens 86 When using 3D Glasses ccccccseseeeeeeeeees 87 3D Imaging VIEWING range eeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 87 Watching 3D IMAGING sents cccsosscewecwonwenaatakxnecaseecees 88 SLNALNOO i SLNALNOO I II CONTENTS TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE When connecting a USB device 006 90 INP ei cosmetics E A E 92 MOVIGIS ar ee ee a nee 96 FOU NSE eeri eiai 107 MUSC IS ceccossensieccectaies caecieatsnesencactaasasscantaieiak 117 DivX Registration Code ccccceeseeeeeeeeeeees 126 DEACTIVATION ccccecececececececccececeaeaeaeanereeseerens 127 GAME SINC Nf acencisinecersencatevnsceantumuscactaceettaaesobeaeseudumcauecens 128 EPG ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE IN DIGITAL MODE Switch on off EPG us seressacasesae ates esassinenaunenssenes 130
150. cepts your selection or displays the current mode Allows the user to move return one step in an inter active application EPG or other user interaction function Clears all on screen displays and returns to TV viewing from any menu Shows programme guide gt p 129 INFO Shows the present screen information AD APP Switches the Audio Description On or Off Select the MHP TV menu source Only Italy Only 47 55LX98 A 33 NOILVdaVvdsdd E A 34 PREPARATION LIGHT ENERGY AVMODE INPUT Vea 0 08G SAVING O to 9 number Selects a programme button Selects numbered items in a menu Space Opens an empty space on the screen keyboard LIST Displays the programme table gt p 55 Q VIEW Returns to the previously viewed programme Coloured buttons L R SELECT SIMPLINK CO CD er These buttons are used for teletext on TELETEXT models only Programme edit Use this to view 3D video gt p 89 See a list of AV devices connected to TV When you toggle this button the Simplink menu appears at the screen gt p 62 Direct access to your internet portal of entertainment and news services developed by Orange Only France TELETEXT These buttons are used for teletext Boo eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee amp BUTTONS For further details see the Teletext section gt p 177 SUBTITLE Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode LIGHT ENERGY AVMODE INPU
151. ch option it was last set to even if you switch the set off Prevents children from watching certain adults TV programmes according to the ratings limit set Enter a password to watch a blocked programme Rating differs by country 6 Lock Blocking Off Permits all Programmes for 18 and above will 5 e Set Password programmes be blocked oo e Lock System AON A a e Block Programme oO a Eas e Parental Guide fon e Input Block E e Input Block FU ey Lock i OE of 16 and above 17 and above 18 and above a 16 and above 17 and above amp 18 and above Blocking Off ia Except for France Only France Select LOCK Select Lock System Ve Select Parental Guidance ar A x Make appropriate adjustments Ls SONILVG g JOYLNOOD IWLNSAdVd e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen 174 EXTERNAL INPUT BLOCKING Enables you to block an input It is available to use this function in Lock System On m Image shown may differ from your TV LOCK Avi e AV2 O p e Set Password e Set Password Fca e Lock System gt On oo e Lock System e Component Off B oo A e Block Programme e Parental Guidance Blocking Off e Input Block e HDMI1 o b e HDMI2 e Key Lock Off e Key Lock e HDMI3 e HDMI4 Li Close RA
152. ch to Home Theater speakers gt When the headset connection continuously fails pair the device one more time gt The audio quality of mono headsets will not be as good as that for stereo headsets gt Mono headsets may suffer from noise as the distance from the TV increases because they use a different transmission method compared There might be an audio delay depending on the buffer memory size of the headset gt The stereo mono headset officially certified to be Bluetooth compatible can be searched and connected gt The stereo mono headset that supports the A2DP or HSP function among the Bluetooth devices can be connected gt If the surrounding environment of the TV is as follows the device may not be searched or connected properly If there is strong electromagnetic wave If there are many Bluetooth devices with stereo headsets If the headset is turned off not in place or gt When a Bluetooth headset is in use the has an error l Volume and Mute keys do not work and Because products such as microwave oven the Audio menu returns to the default value wireless LAN plasma light gas range etc and is disabled use the same frequency range it can cause gt With Bluetooth set to On if any registered communication error devices are turned on the TV will switch to gt Only one Bluetooth headset can be connect Bluetooth mode automatically even though you ed at once are watching in another input mode In
153. communication errors malfunctions associated with your broadband internet con nection or other connected equipment gt LG is not responsible for problems within your internet connection gt Some content available through the network connection may not be compatible with the TV If you have questions about such content please contact the producer of the content gt You may experience undesired results if the network connection speed does not meet the requirements of the content being accessed gt Some internet connection operations may not be possible due to certain restrictions set by the Internet service provider ISP supplying your broadband Internet connection gt Any fees charged by an ISP including without limitation connection charges are your respon sibility gt A 10 Base T or 100 Base TX LAN port is required for connection to this TV If your internet service does not allow for such a connection you will not be able to connect the TV gt A DSL modem is required to use DSL service and a cable modem is required to use cable modem service Depending on the access method of and subscriber agreement with your ISP you may not be able to use the internet connection feature contained in this TV or you may be limited to the number of devices you can connect at the same time If your ISP lim its sub scription to one device this TV may not be allowed to connect when a PC is already connected EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT
154. conscience confusion or disorientation loss of directional sense cramps or nausea immediately stop watch ing the 3D imaging and consult a doctor Parents should monitor their children including teenagers for these symptoms as they may be more sensitive to the effects of watching 3D TV Risk of photosensitization seizure can be reduced with the following actions Take frequent breaks from watching 3D TV For those who have vision that is different in each eye they should watch the TV after taking vision correction measures Watch the TV so that your eyes are on the same level as the 3D screen and refrain from sitting too closely to the TV Do not watch the 3D imaging when tired or sick and avoid watching the 3D imaging for a long pe riod of time Do not wear the 3D glasses for any other pur pose than viewing 3D imaging on a 3D TV Some viewers may feel disoriented after watch ing 3D TV Therefore after you watch 3D TV take a moment to regain awareness of your situ ation before moving Do not use the TV in close proximity to other elec tronic equipment and IR equipment In Analog TV 3D Imaging does not work When watching 2D We eae it is recommended to take off the 3D glasses If you watch 2D images with the 3D glasses on you may see distorted images When watching digital TV in 3D urle mode monitor out signals cannot be output the SCART cable If you set the 3D mode to On while a schedule
155. cribe recipients rights relating to the Covered Code You may distribute the Executable version of Covered Code or ownership rights under a license of Your choice which may contain terms different from this License provided that You are in compliance with the terms of this License and that the license for the Executable version does not attempt to limit or alter the recipient s rights in the Source Code version from the rights set forth in this License If You distribute the Executable version under a different license You must make it absolutely clear that any terms which differ from this License are offered by You alone not by the Initial Developer or any Contributor You hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by the Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result of any such terms You offer 3 7 Larger Works You may create a Larger Work by combining Covered Code with other code not governed by the terms of this License and distribute the Larger Work as a single product In such a case You must make sure the requirements of this License are fulfilled for the Covered Code 4 Inability to Comply Due to Statute or Regulation If it is impossible for You to comply with any of the terms of this License with respect to some or all of the Covered Code due to statute judicial order or regulation then You must a comply with the terms of this License to the max imum extent possible an
156. d Record the model number and serial number of s the TV Refer to the label on the back cover and quote this information to your dealer when requiring any service Digital Video Broadcasting Moe e Trade Mark of the DVB Digital Video Serial No Broadcasting Project 1991 to 1996
157. d b describe the limitations and the code they affect Such description must be included in the LEGAL file described in Section 3 4 and must be included with all distributions of the Source Code Except to the extent prohibited by statute or regulation such description must be sufficiently detailed for a recipient of ordinary skill to be able to understand it 5 Application of this License This License applies to code to which the Initial Developer has attached the notice in Exhibit A and to related Covered Code 6 Versions of the License 6 1 New Versions Netscape Communications Corporation Netscape may publish revised and or new versions of the License from time to time Each version will be given a distinguishing version number 6 2 Effect of New Versions Once Covered Code has been published under a particular version of the License You may always continue to use it under the terms of that version You may also choose to use such Covered Code under the terms of any subse quent version of the License published by Netscape No one other than Netscape has the right to modify the terms applicable to Covered Code created under this License 6 3 Derivative Works If You create or use a modified version of this License which you may only do in order to apply it to code which is not already Covered Code governed by this License You must a rename Your license so that the phrases Mozilla MOZILLAPL MOZPL Netscape M
158. d eessen ais 157 BALANCE gorr E 158 TV Speakers On Off Setup ceeceee 159 DTV Audio Setting in digital mode only 160 Selecting Digital Audio Out ceeeee 161 Audio TS SC bo orcas seeneten erat cceenusccasocnnaesnotend 162 Audio Description In digital mode only 163 I II Stereo Dual Reception In Analogue Mode Only 164 NICAM Reception In Analogue Mode Only 165 Speaker Sound Output Selection 165 On Screen Menu Language Country Selection 166 Language Selection cccccccccssseeeeeeseeeeees 167 TIME SETTING Ea e CUD E E EE E 169 Auto on off time setting cccceceeeeeeeeeeees 170 Sleep Timer setting vcccictwesdo ncencwewterediddexeddonsact 171 PARENTAL CONTROL RATINGS Set Password amp Lock SysteM 0cccee 172 Block PROOM AMIN G aces covecceducdcacecnddtarcesenteactioses 173 Parental Control In Digital Mode only 174 External Input Blocking ccccseeeeeeeeeeeees 175 KOy LOC pace sere na e sete EER R 176 TELETEXT VICI OROT sspe sern ni aE 177 SIMPLE VO Xie senandegatescencsnatsnareaaneecsscsimneaceateans 177 TOP vs sescccteccisccnseace eestanescentececsasceesicteanase 178 FASTEXT ccsncasiadocstadabaatetonstaeeseestiadenacdonssetsenans 178 Special Teletext FUNCTIONS ceceeeeeee scenes 179 DIGITAL TELETEXT Teletext within Digital Service cc008 180 Teletext in Digi
159. d recording is performed on digital TV monitor out Se cannot be output through the SCART cable and the recording cannot be performed hrough WHEN USING 3D GLASSES gt 3D glasses are sold separately Refer to the 3D glasses manual for operating instructions gt Do not use the 3D glasses to replace your corrective glasses sunglasses or protective goggles gt Do not store the 3D glasses in hot or cold locations gt Do not drop objects onto the 3D glasses Do not drop or bend the glasses gt Since the lenses of the 3D glasses are easily scratched make sure to clean only with a soft cloth Shake off any dust before using the cloth since the glasses are easily scratched 3D IMAGING VIEWING RANGE TV size viewing angle amp other circumstances may change the viewing distance and the angle of view Viewing 2mMm 7m DIRES Viewing 120 Angle When the viewing distance is 2 m OINISVA dE i 87 OINISVA dE i 3D IMAGING WATCHING 3D IMAGING Play the video produced in 3D Refer to the following for the supported imaging Horizontal Vertical Frequency kHz Frequency Hz 45 Signal Resolution 1920X1080 Component npu Plasma TV Only 1080i 720p 1080i Playable 3D video format Top amp Bottom Side by Side HDMI V 1 4 with 3D Frame Packing HDMI V 1 4 with 3D Frame Packing Top amp Bottom Side by Side _ Checker Board _ Single Frame Sequential Top amp Bottom
160. d distrib ute a copy of this License along with the Library You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Library and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a The modified work must itself be a software library b You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change c You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License d If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that in the event an application does not supply such function or table the facility still operates and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful For example a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well defined independent of the application Therefore Subsection 2d requires that any application supplied function or table used by this function must be optional if the application
161. displayed Select OPTION Select OPTION Select Language Language ees Select Audio Language Subtitle C Language or Text Language Except d er UK i He Select your desired language Save Go Select Hard of Hearing J iS Select On or Off 2 eR e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen Select Disability Assistance TOHLNOS ADVNONVT 8 ANNOS E 167 JOYLNOOD ADVNONVT 8 ANNOS E 168 SOUND amp LANGUAGE CONTROL lt Audio Language Selection gt gt When two or more audio languages are broadcast you can D MPEG etree eee m C tag Fdo tor Henra moare BRU lt f Select Audio or Audio Language OK n Select an audio language HE AAC HE AAC Audio lt Subtitle Language Selection gt Subtitle Language OSD Information gt When two or more subtitle languages are broadcast you can select the subtitle language with the SUBTITLE button ee gt Press the button to select a subtitle language The audio subtitles can be displayed in a simpler form with 1 to 3 characters broadcast by the service pro vider When you select supplementary Audio Audio for Visual Hearing Impaired the TV may output a part of the Main audio TIME SETTING CLOCK SETUP The clock is set automatically when receiving a digital signal in Auto mode You can set the clock manually in Manual mode You must set the time correctly before using on off timer functio
162. does not supply it the square root function must still compute square roots These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regard less of who wrote it XIGNAddV i 21 Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library or with a work based on the Library on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library To do this you must alter all the notices that refer to this License so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License version 2 in
163. e copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so sub ject to the following conditions THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE OPEN SOURCE LICENSE GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 June 1991 Copyright C 1989 1991 Free Software Foundation Inc 51 Franklin Street Fifth Floor Boston MA 02110 1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation s software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Publ
164. e best picture quality SCREEN SETUP FOR PC MODE Screen Reset Returns Position Size and Phase to the factory default settings This function works in the following mode RGB PC L PICTURE Ollaipiiess U e Colour 60 EE e Tint 0 Rume e Colour Temp O MII gt To Set e Advanced Control e Picture Reset Yes TruMotion Off e Screen Select PICTURE Select Screen Select Reset Select Yes Run Reset e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen dNLAS LNAWdINOA WNYsALXS f 15 dNLAS LNAWdINOA WNdYsALXS i 16 EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP Auto Configure RGB PC mode only Automatically adjusts the picture position and minimizes image instability After adjustment if the image is still not correct your TV is functioning properly but needs further adjustment Auto configure This function is for automatic adjustment of the screen position size and phase The displayed image will be unstable for a few seconds while the auto configuration is in progress 3 PICTURE bA SCREEN 5 VildiPliCss IU RRR _ e Colour 60 EE 4 zy Auto Config e Tin REM e Colour Temp 0O E gt Auto Config 3 e Advanced Control e e Picture Reset Yes e TruMotion SOf e Screen gt Select PICTURE e If the position of the image is still not correct try Auto adjustment again e If p
165. e is displayed Using the remote control Play the selected movie file Once a movie file finishes playing the next selected one will be played automatically Mark all movie files on the screen Deselect all marked movie files Exit the Mark Mode Return to normal TV viewing NOTE gt If you select Yes from OSD when playing the same file after the movie file has been stopped it will restart where it stopped previously gt If continuous series files exist within the folder the next file will automatically be played But this excludes cases when the Repeat function of Movie List Option is turned On Refer to p 104 or when set as Marked Play JDIAAG Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL i 101 AJDIAAG Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL i 102 TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE Using the Movie List function play m Image shown may differ from your TV Choose options Set Video Play Set Video Set Audio Close 01 02 30 02 30 25 Option fe Hide Exit da gt gt eg Show the Option menu L7 Select Set Video Play Set Video Set Audio or Set 3D video Only 42 47LX6 GW 47 55LX9 50 60PX9 NOTE gt Option values changed in Movie List does not affect Photo List and Music List gt Option value changed in Photo List and Music List are changed likewise in Photo List and Music List excluding Movie List gt When replaying the video file after stopping you can play from where
166. e on the date Initial Developer first distributes Original Code under the terms of this License d Notwithstanding Section 2 1 b above no patent license is granted 1 for code that You delete from the Original Code 2 separate from the Original Code or 3 for infringements caused by i the modification of the Original Code or ii the combination of the Original Code with other software or devices 2 2 Contributor Grant Subject to third party intellectual property claims each Contributor hereby grants You a world wide royalty free non exclusive license a under intellectual property rights other than patent or trademark Licensable by Contributor to use repro duce modify display perform sublicense and distribute the Modifications created by such Contributor or por tions thereof either on an unmodified basis with other Modifications as Covered Code and or as part of a Larger Work and b under Patent Claims infringed by the making using or selling of Modifications made by that Contributor either alone and or in combination with its Contributor Version or portions of such combination to make use sell offer for sale have made and or otherwise dispose of 1 Modifications made by that Contributor or portions thereof and 2 the combination of Modifications made by that Contributor with its Contributor Version or por tions of such combination c the licenses granted in Sections 2 2 a and 2 2 b are effective o
167. e prevent children under the age of 5 from watching 3D TV It may affect their vision development Warning for photosensitization seizure Some viewers may experience a seizure or epi lepsy when exposed to certain factors including flashing lights or image as in TV or video games ONOTE To watch the TV in 3D you must put on your 3D e For best results you should wear LG rand 3D glasses The 3D imaging may not dis play properly when using another brand of 3D glasses Please see the 3D glasses manual for instructions on how to use the 3D glasses After powering on the TV a few seconds may be l l p needed for your TV to calibrate It may take a moment for you to see the 3D imag ing if you look away from the TV and then revert our TrA back to the 3D program he TV may flicker a if the 3D imaging is dis played under 3 wavelength lamp fluorescent light 50 Hz 60 Hz or magnetic fluorescent lamp 60 Hz 60 iat In such instances it is recommended to turn the lights off If there is an obstacle between the TV and the 3D glasses the 3D imaging may not display properly If you or anybody from your family has a history of epilepsy or seizure please consult with your doc tor before watching 3D TV If you experience any dizziness or light headed ness visual transition or altered vision visual or fa cial instability such as eye or muscle twitching un conscious action convulsion loss of
168. e under any particular circumstance the balance of the sec tion is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 8 If the distribution and or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 9 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the General Public License from time to time
169. e you are currently watching Switch to the chosen programme number TOHLNOOS JWWYH9O d AL ONIHOLVM 5 55 TOYLNOO ANWVESDOdd AL ONIHOLVM E 56 WATCHING TV PROGRAMME CONTROL m Paging through a programme list Turn the pages Return to normal TV viewing Displaying the favourite programme list Favourite List 1 BBC 2 BBC 3 BBC PrReg E Pr Ecit Turn the programme edit Ea Display the Favourite Programme List MARINU Current channel is registered cancelled as preferred channel on currently selected Group i Favourite group is changed INPUT LIST HDMI and AV1 SCART can be recognized by a detect pin and thus enabled only when an external device approves voltage By using TV RAD button you can move from External Input to RF Input and to the last watched pro gramme in DIV RADIO TV mode m Image shown may differ from your TV Input List CE JOG OOO zhen E B ri Deo KA FU USB1 USB2 AV1 AV2 Component RGB HDMI1 HDMI2 HDMI3 HDMI4 MM input Label J Exit e Antenna or Cable Select it when watch Select the input source ing the DTV RADIO TV e USB Select it when using USB depends on connector AV Select it when watching the VCR or external equipment e Component Select it
170. eatured videos list will be displayed Popular The best rated videos list from YouTube server will be displayed Most Viewed The most viewed videos list will be displayed Search The keypad keyboard menu will be displayed History The videos list that you previously played will be displayed Maximum of 20 videos can be stored Favorites In sign in status this menu will be displayed the videos list that is arranged in the YouTube server with your account Some videos may not appear on the Favorites list even if the videos are arranged in the server Sign in Sign Out Displays the keypad keyboard menu to sign in or returns to the sign out status Using the remote control E Stops the video and displays related videos list sesososesecososesecosssooesecosesoecososecessosesecosososecosssseseossosesecosocossocssesosooeseoososossoossosesecoscseecoossosesocosecesososecossosesecossseseoossssoesocososeseoosocossoossoo Return to TV viewing ACCUWEATHER Accuweather is the programme to view the weather of the city the user wants AccuWeather Screen Components AccuWeather menu Weather list by city Corresponding buttons on the remote control Return to TV viewing AccuWeather Service menu e Home The weather of selected city is displayed e Favorite City Frequently checked cities can be registered to check the weather NOTE gt By default New York London and Paris are registered and the user can add delete
171. ect Signal Test Display Manufacturer Model Type Serial Number and Software Version Display the information of Channel e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen PRODUCT SERVICE INFORMATION This function is a customer support function that can see product service information and customer service center information l Product Service Info E Network Test Close ral i f Press OK to set programme settings Te Customer Support ECAV ENNEN Je Exit Select Customer Support Select Product Service Info e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing Display Model Type Software version Serial Number e Press the BACK button to move Customer service center and Homepage to the previous menu screen JOYLNOOD ANWVESDOdd AL ONIHOLVM 5 NETWORK TEST Check the network status Network Status O Software Update O Picture Test ai sane i Network connecting O Signal Test me l P e e CI Product Service Info 3 O M ke ae Network Test Setting Test Close ae e Press OK to set programme settings a ol Customer Support HE Simple Manual re Exit By re Select Customer Support ESSE Select Network Test e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move Chack the network status to the previous menu screen
172. educe the power consumption And TV should be switched off using the power switch on the TV if it will not be watched for some time as this will reduce energy consumption The energy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the level of brightness of the picture is reduced and this will reduce the overall running cost NOILVdaVvdsdd E A CAUTION gt Do not step on the glass stand or subject it to any impact It may break causing possible injury from frag ments of glass or the TV may fall gt Do not drag the TV The floor or the product may be damaged m Image shown may differ from your TV Only 50 60PK5 Remote Control Sensor Intelligent Sensor Adjusts picture accord ing to the surrounding conditions Power Standby Indicator Illuminates red in standby mode e The lighting is off while the TV remains on SPEAKER Touch Button You can use the desired button function by touching O I NPUT ENU POWER INPUT MENU PROGRAMME A 46 Only 50 60PK7 50 60PK9 50 60PX9 Intelligent Sensor Adjusts picture according to the surrounding conditions Remote Control Sensor SPEAKER Power Standby Indicator Emitter Only 50 60PX9 e lluminates red in standby mode It is the part equipped with the emitter exchanging signal with 3D glasses Please be careful not to block the screen with objects or ye le while watching a ideo e The lighting is off while the TV remains on
173. elect PICTURE Select Picture Reset aL Lv J Select Yes Initialize the adjusted value PICTURE Q All picture settings will be reset Continue ves E e TruMotion e Screen e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen TOYLNOO 3HNL ld E 147 JOYLNOOD 3HNL ld 5 148 PICTURE CONTROL TRUMOTION LCD TV LED LCD TV ONLY It is used for the best picture quality without any motion blur or judder when you enter a quick image or Film Source High Provide smoother picture movement Low Provide smooth picture movement Use this setting for standard use Off Turn off TruMotion Operation User User can adjust Judder and Blur level in TruMotion Operation separately Judder Adjust noise of the screen Blur Adjust after image of the screen This feature is disable in RGB PC HDMI PC mode If you enable TruMotion noise may appear on the screen If this occurs set TruMotion to Off If you select Picture Mode Game set TruMotion to Off Ca PICTURE Colour 60 am TruMotion e Tint 0 e Judder 3 iz e Colour Temp 0 w e Advanced Control oo e Blur 3 E e Picture Reset e TruMotion Off e Screen Select PICTURE Select TruMotion Select Low High User or Off Make appropriate adjustments e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Pre
174. elect Sound Mode Auto Volume Clear Voice Il or Balance m When you select the Set 3D video Only 42 47LX6 47 55LX9 50 60PX9 3 Puton 3D glasses Sex Sit 2 meters from TV to enjoy the best 3D view To select more comfortable view for you change to left right image of glasses with I button Ef Power on your 3D glasses and put them on Sit 2 meters from TV to enjoy the best 3D view E 3D effect setting 10 EEEH WN Setting Left Right 5 End 3D video For more information see the 3D Imaging section in the Owner s Manual ta Power on your 3D glasses and put them on Sit 2 meters from TV to enjoy the best 3D view E Left Right image change MUSIC LIST You can play music files on USB or PC storage device Purchased music files MP3 may contain copyright restrictions Playback of these files may not be supported by this model Music file on your USB device can be played by this unit The On Screen Display may be different from your TV Images are an example to assist with the TV operation MUSIC MP3 supporting file Bit rate 32 to 320 e Sampling rate MPEG1 Layer3 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz e Sampling rate MPEG2 Layer3 16 kHz 22 05 kHz 24 kHz Screen Components You can also adjust USB in the INPUT menu 2 TPO Select MY MEDIA Select Music List Preview If any album jacket for the file Album Art Image J Music List Ba exists this jacket is displayed
175. elected programme is deleted all the following programmes are shifted up one m Moving a programme Select a programme number to be moved Release Turn the programme number to green a Skipping a programme number e When a programme number is skipped it means that you will be unable to select it Select a programme number to be skipped using the P v button during normal TV viewing e If you wish to select a skipped programme annie programme NUMEO DUE directly enter the programme number with the NUMBER buttons or select it in the Release programme edit or EPG m Auto Sort e After activating Auto Sort once you can no longer edit programmes Start Auto Sort m Locking a programme number e It can be registered as Lock eS Select a programme number to be locked programme even when Lock 4 System is turned Off Turn the programme number to yellow Release m Selecting favourite programme Favourite programmes is a convenient feature that lets you quickly scan up to programmes of your choice without having to wait for the TV to scan through all the in between programmes Select your desired programme MARK Add corresponding programme to Favourite list of current Favourite group JOYLNOO ANWVESDOdd AL ONIHOLVM E 45 TOYLNOOD ANWVESDOdd AL ONIHOLVM E 46 WATCHING TV PROGRAMME CONTROL m Selecting favourite programme group Select your desired programme j Display a
176. er these terms A work based on the Library means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Library or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated straightforwardly into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For a library complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library s complete source code as you receive it in any medi um provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and dis claimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty an
177. er these terms or alternatively under the terms of the ordinary General Public License To apply these terms attach the following notices to the library It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found lt one line to give the library s name and a brief idea of what it does gt Copyright C lt year gt lt name of author gt This library is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 1 of the License or at your option any later version This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library if not write to the Free Software Foundation Inc 51 Franklin Street Fifth Floor Boston MA 02110 1301 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or your school if any to sign a copyright disclaimer for the library if necessary Here is a sample alter the names
178. erprint on surface of the exterior tion For cleaning front frame please slowly wipe in one direction after spraying water 1 2 times on cleansing cloths Please remove excessive moisture after cleaning Excessive moisture may cause water stains on the frame a ea oe Only Only 55LE5 55LE75 Only 32LE4 Only Only 2 7 42 47LE7 xk KKK KKK eee Su ae A2 47 55LE8 55LE78 SSLE7Q 37 42LE4 32 37 42LE4 32 37 42 47LE79 ii A2IA7LX6 F e E gt T xs xs E 4 4 x4 Al M4 x 16 M4 x 20 M4 x 24 M4 x 16 M4 x22 M4 x 24 M4x16 Bolts for stand assembly Use of ferrite core This feature is not available for all models Ferrite core can be used to reduce the gi TD 2 A electromagnetic wave when connecting KC fl the power cord Il NSS The closer the location of the ferrite core Ferrite Core to the power plug the better it is Install the power plug closely This item is not included for all models A 1 NOILVdVdsdd E PREPARATION FRONT PANEL CONTROLS NOTE gt TV can be placed in standby mode in order to reduce the power consumption And TV should be switched off using the power switch on the TV if it will not be watched for some time as this will reduce energy consumption The energy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the level of brightness of the picture is reduced and this will reduce the overall running cost A C
179. ers R R Audio signal from audio R input is sent to left and right loudspeakers TOHLNOS ADVNONVT 8 ANNOS E 165 TOYLNOOD ADVNONVI 8 ANNOS E 166 SOUND amp LANGUAGE CONTROL ON SCREEN MENU LANGUAGE COUNTRY SELECTION The installation guide menu appears on the TV screen when it is switched on for the first time Select your desired language Select your country Except for 32 37 42LE49 32 37 42 47 55LE59 42 47LE7390 32 37 42 47 55LE79 42 47 55LE89 32 37 42LD49 32 37 42 47 55LD69 32 42 47LD79 32 37 42LD89 42 47LX69 50 60PK59 50 60PK79 50 60PK99 50 60PX99 If you want to change Language Country selection SEESE OETIQN gt gt Select OPTION Select Language Language gt Select Country oS Select Menu Language Select your country IDE Select your desired language OWD cslbct Yes of No Save Save Except for 32 37 42LE49 32 37 42 47 55LE59 42 47LE7390 32 37 42 47 55LE79 42 47 55LE89 32 37 42LD49 32 37 42 47 55LD69 32 42 47LD79 32 37 42LD89 42 47LX69 50 60PK59 50 60PK79 50 60PK99 50 60PX99 e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen NOTE gt If you do not finish the set up Installation Guide by pressing BACK or if you time out on the OSD On EED AG the installation menu will continuously appear until the set up is completed whenever the
180. es or content in any case and without notice or liability LG expressly disclaims any responsibility or liability for any change interruption disabling removal of or suspension of any content or service made available through this device LG is neither responsible nor liable for customer service related to the content and services Any question or request for service relating to the content or services should be made directly to the respective content and service providers ISVOLAN E 69 ISVOLAN E 70 NETCAST NETCAST MENU These services are provided by separate Content Provider Please visit the content providers web site for specific information on their services But some content manual maybe not provide depending on Content Provider NetCast menu source can differ by country Weather YouTube Picasa Select NETCAST menu option Enjoy the AccuWeather Picasa or YouTube NOTE gt The videos list searched from the TV may different with the list searched from a web browser on PC gt The settings of this TV do not affect the YouTube s playback quality gt The playback videos may be paused stopped or buffering occurring often depending on your broadband speed We recommend a minimum connection speed of 1 5 Mbps For the best playback condition a con nection speed of 4 0 Mbps is required Sometimes your broadband speed varies based on your ISP s network conditions
181. esenetsneneesneaesenseeseneeesnnneesnnneesnnneeanenetanenttesnneteeneeegenaeesengeesnnnetgneetsneet Pept without stand 786 0 mm x 500 0 mm x 39 9 mm 907 0 mm x 565 0 mm x 39 9 mm oe it We al ae a EEEn E EE without stand 10 6 kg 12 1 kg Power requirement AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz Power Consumption 130 W 140 W 42LE4 MODELS 42LE4800 ZB 42LE4900 ZB Dimensions with stand 1018 0 mm x 692 0 mm x 270 0 mm ocos oc o ss ssssssnnsecssnssossntsossustoeessssoessstsosesstooesanseceessnsoqesantsonesersotneanssonesensoqneasesotesansannenetsonsanssenessesoneserseseee Depth without stand 1018 0 mm x 627 0 mm x 29 8 mm ee ae ener enn re ean ern et rte Weight J without stand 14 5 kg Power requirement AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz Power Consumption 150 W secssesosccosososocoosososocosesossocosesosososesoosososocosososscoosososocosessosocosososocossssososososossosocosecosoososossosocososocsosocososocoosososessocososocoosocosososoosecosososoososocossecosesos CI Module Size Width x Height x Depth 0 C to 40 C Less than 80 Operating Temperature Environment condition Operating Humidity Storage Temperature 20 C to 60 C Storage Humidity Less than 85 Supported movie files Refer to p 96 to 97 m The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement W B i RS Dimensions Width x Height x Depth with stand without stand with stand Weight eI without stand
182. f the bracket on the wall and on the TV is the same A 51 PREPARATION m he TV can be installed in various ways such as on a wall or on a desktop etc NOTE m The TV is designed to be mounted horizontally gt Should Install wall mount on a solid wall per a pendicular to the floor gt Should use a special wall mount if you want U EARTHING l to install it to seine or slanted Wall Ensure that you connect the earth wire to prevent The surface that wall mount is to be mount 0 possible electric shock If grounding methods are ed on should be of sufficient strength to sup gt not possible have a qualified electrician installa port the weight of TV set e g concrete nat 2 separate circuit breaker ural rock brick and hollow block Do not try to earth the TV by connecting it to tele A E r le sl z phone wires lightening rods or gas pipes refer to the instructions included with the mount gt LG is not liable for any accidents or damage Power Supply tee propery or TV due to incorrect installa Where a non compliant VESA wall mount is used Incorrect fastening of screws to surface which may cause TV to fall and cause per sonal injury Not following the recommended Installation DESKTOP PEDESTAL K INSTALLATION m Image shown may differ from your TV Circuit breake For adequate ventilation allow a clearance of 10 cm all around the TV VESA Standard WALL MOUNT
183. f the screen will be turned off in 3 seconds and Screen Off will start e If you adjust Energy Saving Auto Except for 32 37 42LD4 Maximum Backlight feature will not work LCD TV LED LCD TV only e If you adjust Energy Saving Intelligent Sensor Sharpness Colour Colour Temperature feature will not work Plasma TV only e You can also adjust this feature by selecting Energy Saving button on the remote control e When selecting Auto Backlight is automatically adjusted through intelligent sensor according to the surrounding condition when intelligent sensor is in the TV LCD TV LED LCD TV only Except for a 32 37 42LD4 138 PRESET PICTURE SETTINGS Picture Mode Preset Vivid Standard Cinema or IHX Cinema TX Bright Room Sport Game LCD TV LED LCD TV only Strengthen the contrast brightness colour and sharpness for vivid picture The most general screen display status Optimizes power consumption Plasma TV Only Optimizes video for watching movies This is the specification to optimize TV viewing in Bright Room 42 47 55LE8 Plasma TV Only Optimizes video for watching sports events Optimizes video for playing games Plasma TV only J PICTURE gt e Aspect Ratio 2 16 0 e Picture Wizard e Energy Saving Off Standard 1 e Backlight 1 i of e Picture Mode 4 c e i e Contrast w 7 T O e Brightness D
184. f what it does gt Copyright C lt year gt lt name of author gt This program is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 of the License or at your option any later version This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU General Public License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program if not write to the Free Software Foundation Inc 51 Franklin Street Fifth Floor Boston MA 02110 1301 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail If the program is interactive make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode Gnomovision version 69 Copyright C year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY for details type show wi This is free software and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions type show c for details The hypothetical commands show w and show c should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License Of course the commands you use may be called something other than show w and show c they could even be mouse clicks or menu items whatever suits your program
185. functions transmit OxFF data based on this format Acknowledgement data feed back presents status about each function OK Ack Error Ack and other message may dis play on the screen when TV is power On 02 Aspect Ratio Command k c Main Picture Size gt To adjust the screen format Main picture format You can also adjust the screen format using the Aspect Ratio in the Q MENU or PICTURE menu Transmission k c Set ID Data Cr Data 01 Nomal screen 4 3 07 149 02 Wide screen 16 9 09 Just Scan 04 Zoom OB Full Wide 06 Orginal 10 to 1F Cinema Zoom 1 to 16 Ack c Set ID OK NG Data x Using the PC input you select either 16 9 or 4 3 screen aspect ratio In DIV HDMI 1080i 50 Hz 60 Hz 720p 50Hz 60 Hz 1080p 24 Hz 30 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz Component 720p 1080i 1080p 50 Hz 60 Hz mode Just Scan is available Full Wide is supported only for Digital Analogue AV 03 Screen Mute Command k d gt To select screen mute on off Transmission K d Set ID Data Cr Data 00 Screen mute off Picture on Video mute off Screen mute on Picture off Video mute on 01 10 Ack d Set ID OK NG Data x In case of video mute on only TV will display On Screen Display OSD But in case of Screen mute on TV will not display OSD 04 Volume Mute Command k e gt To control volume mute on off You can also adjust mute using the
186. g to the surrounding conditions Remote Control Sensor NOILVaVvdsdd 7 A 3 PREPARATION BACK PANEL INFORMATION m Image shown may differ from your TV Only 32 37 42LE4 32 37 42 47 55LE5 32 37 42 47 55LE75 32 37 42 47 55LE78 32 37 42 47 55LE79 z 42 47 55LE8 Only 42 47LX6 A 4 NOILVdVvdsdd E Power Cord Socket This TV operates on an AC power The volt age is indicated on the Specifications page gt Sea to 200 Never attempt to operate the TV on DC power LAN Network connection for AccuWeather Picasa YouTube etc Also used for video photo and music files on a local network OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT Connect digital audio to various types of equipment Connect to a Digital Audio Component Use an Optical audio cable RGB DVI Audio Input Connect the audio from a PC or DTV Euro Scart Socket AV1 Connect scart socket input or output from an external device to these jacks Component Input Connect a component video audio device to these jacks HDMI DVI IN Input Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN Or DVI VIDEO signal to HDMI DVI port with DVI to HDMI cable VIDED ALDI OO OO gt Use a product with the following thickness for i optimal connection to HDMI cable Only HDMI E T IN 4 USB device A 10 mm AIDED ALDI RGB IN Input Connect the output from a PC RS 232C IN CONTROL amp SERVICE PORT Connect to the RS 23
187. gnal is received or no operation is performed for 5 minutes If you keep the screen in Freeze condition the residual image can exist SIMPLINK See a list of AV devices connected to TV When you toggle this button the Simplink menu appears at the screen p 62 CD CD Es Direct access to your internet portal of entertainment and news services developed by Orange Only France E TELETEXT These buttons are used for teletext BUTTONS For ida details see the Teletext section gt p 177 SUBTITLE Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode A 54 ENERGY AVMODE INPUT avec LIGHT ENERGY AVMODE INPUT ve 0O 08G ust 0 om FE hy AA m P MUTE Go Ce Gn d BACK FA EXIT lt mO TT VOLUME UP Adjusts the volume DOWN MARK Select the input to apply the Picture Wizard settings Check and un check programmes in the USB menu NOILVdaVvdsdd 7 FAV Displays the selected favourite programme CHAR NUM Shifts the Character or Number for NetCast menu RATIO Selects your desired Aspect Ratio of picture gt p 135 DELETE Deletes the entered character when entering the character on the screen keyboard MUTE Switches the sound on or off Programme Selects a programme UP DOWN PAGE UP Move from one full set of screen information to the DOWN next one SIMPLINK Controls SIMPLINK or MY MEDIA menu Photo List MY MEDIA Music List and Movie List Menu
188. h broadcasting station has its own signal conditions volume adjustment may be needed every time the programme is changed This feature allows users to enjoy stable volume levels by mak ing automatic adjustments for each programme If sound quality or volume is not at the level you want it is recommended to use a separate home the ater system or amp to cope with different user environments auno e Auto Volume Off e Clear Voice II of 3 0 On e Balance o MMMM TR e e Sound Mode Standard e Infinite Sound Off e Treble Bass AUDIO e Auto Volume Off e Clear Voice II Off 3 e Balance 0 m e Sound Mode Standard e Infinite Sound Off e Treble e Bass 50 e Reset 50 e Reset e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen CLEAR VOICE Il By differentiating the human sound range from others it helps users listen to human voices better auno e Auto Volume e Auto Volume Off e Clear Voice II Of w 3 e Balance 0 i e Clear Voice II Savors e Balance e Level a 3 i e Sound Mode Standard aaaaaaaaaaaaaussuuusssssssus naIasslsll ol e Infinite Sound ose Cid e Treble e Bass e T Ff W Y e Sound Mode Standard e Infinite Sound Off e Treble e Bass 50 e Reset e If you select On for Clear Voice Il Secchi Infinite Sound feat
189. h subtitle files of 1 MB or larger may not be played properly e The screen may suffer temporary interruptions image stoppage faster playback etc when the audio language is changed e A damaged movie file may not be played correctly or some player functions may not be usable e Movie files produced with some encoders may not be played correctly e If the video and audio structure of recorded file is not interleaved either video or audio is outputted e HD videos with a maximum of 1920x1080 25 30P or 1280x720 50 60P are supported depending on the frame e Videos with resolutions higher than 1920X1080 25 30P or 1280x720 50 60P may not work properly depending on the frame e Movie files other than the specified types and formats may not work properly e Max bitrate of playable movie file is 20 Mbps e We do not guarantee smooth playback of profiles encoded level 4 1 or higher in H 264 AVC e DTS Audio codec is not supported e A movie file more than 30 GB in file size is not supported for playback e A DivX movie file and its subtitle file must be located in the same folder e A video file name and its subtitle file name must be identical for it to be displayed e Playing a video via a USB connection that doesn t support high speed may not work properly e The movie file encoded by the GMC Global Motion Compensation and Qpel Quarterpel Motion Estimation is not supported e When you are watching the movie by Movie List function
190. he Program or with a work based on the Program on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may copy and distribute the Program or a work based on it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following a Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or b Accompany it with a written offer valid for at least three years to give any third party for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution a complete machine readable copy of the corresponding source code to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or c Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or exe cutable form with such an offer in accord with Subsection b above The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For an executable work complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface defini tio
191. hen you switch off the TV all connected devices are turned off Switch audio out Offers an easy way to switch audio out Sync Power on When the equipment with Simplink function connected HDMI terminal starts to play The TV will change automatically to turn on mode A device which is connected to the TV through an HDMI cable but does not support SIMPLINK does not provide this function Note To operate SIMPLINK an High Speed HDMI Cable with CEC function should be used CEC Consumer Electronics Control SIMPLINK Menu Press the lt gt button and then OK button to select the desired SIMPLINK source TV viewing Switch to the previous TV pro gramme regardless of the current mode SIMPUINK OK s Exit DISC playback Select and play connected discs When multiple discs are available the device Selected PEGE type of discs are conveniently displayed at beg aes aor the bottom of the screen bright A y VCR playback Play and control the con gt j HDD Recorder When device is not con nected VCR nected displayed in O a Speaker gray TV Speaker HDD Recordings playback Play and con trol recordings stored in HDD Audio Out to Home theater Audio Out to TV Select Home theater or TV speaker for Audio Out e Home theater Only one supported at a time e DVD Recorder Up to three Only 32 37 42LD4 32 37 42 47 55LD6 32 42 41 LD7 32
192. his requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normal ly accompany the operating system Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute 7 You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side by side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License and distribute such a combined library provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted and provided that you do these two things a Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library uncombined with any other library facilities This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above b Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work 8 You may not copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library is void and will automati cally terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in f
193. hown may differ from your TV Power Cord Socket This TV operates on an AC power The volt age is indicated on the Specifications Sach gt Sea to 200 Never attempt to operate the TV on DC power LAN Network connection for AccuWeather Picasa YouTube etc Also used for video photo and music files on a local network OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT Connect digital audio to various types of equipment Connect to a Digital Audio Component Use an Optical audio cable RGB DVI Audio Input Connect the audio from a PC or DTV Euro Scart Socket AV1 Connect scart socket input or output from an external device to these jacks Component Input Connect a component video audio device to these jacks HDMI DVI IN Input Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN Or DVI VIDEO signal to HDMI DVI port with DVI to DMI cable A CAUTION NOILVdaVvdsdd i gt Use a product with the following thickness for optimal connection to HDMI cable Only HDMI IN 4 USB device A 10 mm RGB IN Input Connect the output from a PC RS 232C IN CONTROL amp SERVICE PORT Connect to the RS 232C port on a PC This port is used for Service or Hotel mode WIRELESS Control Connect the Wireless Ready Dongle to the TV to control the external input devices con nected to Wireless Media Box wirelessly Audio Video Input Connect audio video output from an external device to these jacks Antenna Input Connect antenna
194. ic License instead You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to sur render the rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that you have You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with two steps 1 copyright the software and 2 offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the software Also for each author s protection and ours we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no war ranty for this free software If the software is modified by someone else and passed on we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original so
195. ic audio and Audio Description are provided only for those programmes that have Audio Description included Volume Changes the Audio Description volume Beep Beeps when a programme with Audio Description information is selected 2 OPTION gt OPTION e Language Language e Country UK e Disability Assistance a e Power Indicator e Language Language e Country UK Hard of Hearing J e Disability Assistance e Power Indicator e Factory Reset e Volume B gt o EUIMMNINMENININ e Set ID e Beep e Mode Setting e IR Blaster Close Audio Description e Factory Reset e Set ID al e Mode Setting Home Use e IR Blaster Off Select OPTION Select Disability Assistance AA Select Audio Description Vy Adjustment for Audio Description Volume With selecting On eS Select Volume or Beep OD Make desired adjustment e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen JOYLNOOD ADVNONVT 8 ANNOS E 163 JOYLNOOD ADVNONVT 8 ANNOS E 164 SOUND amp LANGUAGE CONTROL I II STEREO DUAL RECEPTION IN ANALOGUE MODE ONLY When a programme is selected the sound information for the station appears with the programme number and station name OXD Select Audio or Audio Language eS Select the sound output Broadcast On Screen Display Stereo STEREO Dual DUAL I DUAL II DUAL I Il
196. icdveccoseesc cdeeinasateviadeneees 29 Volume Adjustment dacsisecccsenccciacciniieaecesed 29 Quick Men eee eee er eee 30 On Screen Menus Selection and adjustment 31 Auto programme tuning ccccceseeeeeeeeeeeaeees 33 Cable DTV setting ieccnnowss ccccaioer cn iagenciaannbeuneenenere 38 Manual programme TUNING cccccseeeeeeeees 39 Programme Edit cccccccsceceeecseeeeeeeseeeesees 43 BOO Stl sin Od 47 Cl Common Interface Information 48 Software Update cc eccccceccecseeeeseeeeseeeeees 49 Picture Sound TES lsiscccousesscecacenetetettosaneeevackeaee 51 Signal TOSUsccs2essceqascacctscansccaiagersdesticeerinceesteateieaes 52 Product service informatiOn ccccsecceeeeees 53 Network TeSt ccccsscccssccesseceeeesaseeeeessneeseas 53 Simple Manual ccccsccccceeceeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeees 54 Selecting the Programme List cceeee 55 MOU EIS acan i 57 Input Label Beeeeeernert seenneee renee erent tees enn ae ere 58 Data SSVI CC ees E 59 MHP Service see eee ene eee eee 60 SIMPEINK sscseissanwrsscnacseactantanasautiiavonneeduepnasenaweebe 62 AV MOQO eee ene eer ee ee 66 Initializing Reset to original factory settings 67 NETCAST Legal Notice cccccseccseseeceeseesesseeseseeeseeees 68 Netcast M Nnu cccccccsccceeeseseeseseeeaeeseesesees 70 YOUTUBE orenen ene eee eee en eee eee ae 71 ACCUWOatNEL 0cc
197. icense Version 1 1 the License you may not use this file except in compliance with the License You may obtain a copy of the License at http www mozilla org MPL Software distributed under the License is distributed on an AS IS basis WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND either express or implied See the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the License The Original Code is The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Portions created by are Copyright C All Rights Reserved Contributor s Alternatively the contents of this file may be used under the terms of the license the __ License in which case the provisions of License are applicable instead of those above If you wish to allow use of your version of this file only under the terms of the License and not to allow others to use your version of this file under the MPL indicate your decision by deleting the provisions above and replace them with the notice and other provisions required by the ___ License If you do not delete the provisions above a recipient may use your version of this file under either the MPL or the __ License NOTE The text of this Exhibit A may differ slightly from the text of the notices in the Source Code files of the Original Code You should use the text of this Exhibit A rather than the text found in the Original Code Source Code for Your Modifications XIGNAddV i 22 A LG Life s Goo
198. icture needs to be adjusted again after Select Screen Auto adjustment in RGB PC you can adjust the Position Size or Phase Select Auto Config Select Yes e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen Selecting Resolution To view a normal picture match the resolution of RGB mode and selection of PC mode This function works in the following mode RGB PC bA SCREEN LE Resolution Y 1024 x 768 1280 x 768 PICTURE Oliaipness U e Colour 0 ME e Tint o Rume e Colour Temp O MIG e Advanced Control 1360 x 768 e Picture Reset e TruMotion Off A e Screen dNLAS LNAWdINOA WNYsLXS f Select PICTURE Select Screen Select Resolution Select the desired resolution e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen 17 dNLAS LNAWdINOA WNdYsALXS i 18 EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP Adjustment for screen Position Size Phase If the picture is not clear after auto adjustment and especially if characters are still trembling adjust the picture position manually This function works in the following mode RGB PC EA SCREEN PICTURE onarpness U M e Colour 60 EE e Tint 0o cumme e Colour Temp O Em E e Advanced Control e Picture Reset e TruMotion Off e Screen Select PIC
199. idity Storage Temperature Storage Humidity Supported movie files 32LD6 32LD650 ZC 32LD650N ZC 32LD651 ZB 32LD651N ZB 32LD680 ZC 32LD690 ZB 32LD681 ZB 32LD691 ZB 797 0 mm x 555 0 mm x 207 0 mm 797 0 mm x 555 0 mm x 207 0 mm 797 0 mm x 495 0 mm x 73 8 mm 797 0 mm x 495 0 mm x 73 8 mm 9 8 kg 8 7 kg 9 8 kg 8 7 kg AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 150 W AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 150 W 3 LD6 37LD650 ZC 37LD650N ZC 37LD651 ZB 37LD651N ZB 37LD680 ZC 37LD690 ZB 37LD681 ZB 37LD691 ZB 916 0 mm x 625 0 mm x 261 0 mm 916 0 mm x 625 0 mm x 261 0 mm 916 0 mm x 560 0 mm x 77 7 mm 916 0 mm x 560 0 mm x 77 7 mm 12 8 kg 11 2 kg 12 8 kg 11 2 kg AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 170 W AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 170 W 100 0 mm x 55 0 mm x 5 0 mm 0 C to 40 C Less than 80 20 C to 60 C Less than 85 Refer to p 96 to 97 m The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement W B i RS Dimensions Width x Height x Depth with stand without stand with stand Weight eI without stand Power requirement Power Consumption W B HRS Dimensions Width x Height x Depth with stand without stand with stand Weight without stand Power requirement Power Consumption CI Module Size Width x Height x Depth Operating Temperature Environment condition Operating Humidity Storage Temperature Storage Humidity Su
200. iewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen DEMO MODE It is not possible to use Demo Mode in Home Use mode In Store Demo Demo Mode is automatically set to On Once Demo Mode is set to Off in Store Demo Demo Mode does not run and only the screen is reset The screen is reset automatically after 5 minutes in Demo Mode a OPTION e Language Language e Country UK e Disability Assistance e Power Indicator Selecting the environment e Factory Reset Choose the setting mode you want a OPTION e Language Language e Country UK e Disability Assistance a e Power Indicator e Factory Reset e Set ID a e Mode Setting Home Use E o IR Blaster Off e Set ID Select Store Demo to use this TV in store To use e Mode Setting this TV at home select Home Use e IR Blaster i e Demo Mode On Close Select OPTION Select Mode Setting Select Store Demo 4 e D Select On Move to the previous menu screen If you want to stop the demo press any button except for MUTE 1 button e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen TOHLNOOS 3HNL ld E 153 JOYLNOOD ADVNONVT 8 ANNOS E 154 SOUND amp LANGUAGE CONTROL AUTO VOLUME LEVELER Auto Volume automatically remains on the same level of volume if you change programmes Because eac
201. ight x Depth without stand with stand Weight 2 without stand Power requirement Power Consumption CI Module Size 32LE5500 ZA 32LE550N ZA 32LE5800 ZA 32LE5900 ZA 784 6 mm x 558 1 mm x 221 0 mm 784 6 mm x 499 5 mm x 39 9 mm 12 7 kg 10 5 kg AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 130 W 37LE5500 ZA 37LE550N ZA 37LE5800 ZA 37LE5900 ZA 905 0 mm x 630 0 mm x 270 0 mm 905 0 mm x 568 0 mm x 39 9 mm 15 6 kg 12 8 kg AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 140 W 32LE5510 ZB 32LE551N ZB 32LE5810 ZB 32LE5910 ZB 784 6 mm x 558 1 mm x 221 0 mm 784 6 mm x 499 5 mm x 39 9 mm 12 7 kg 10 5 kg AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 130 W 37LE5510 ZB 37LE551N ZB 37LE5810 ZB 37LE5910 ZB 905 0 mm x 630 0 mm x 270 0 mm 905 0 mm x 568 0 mm x 39 9 mm 15 6 kg 12 8 kg AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 140 W 100 0 mm x 55 0 mm x 5 0 mm Width x Height x Depth Operating 0 C to 40 C Temperature i T Less than 80 Environment condition Operating Humidity Storage Temperature Storage Humidity 20 C to 60 C Less than 85 Refer to p 96 to 97 Supported movie files m The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement XIGNAddV i 18 A W B i RS Dimensions Width x Height x Depth with stand without stand with stand Weight 219 without stand Power requirement Power Consumption 0 D HRS Dimensions Width x Height x Depth with s
202. image s while listening to music from Bluetooth device e When the external Bluetooth device is currently sending the photo press the BACK button to stop receiving the photo All photos already received will be deleted as a result e With some Bluetooth devices you may not be able to transmit an image JPEG file to the TV set LISTENING TO THE MUSICS FROM EXTERNAL BLUETOOTH DEVICE For details on how to listen to the musics from the external Bluetooth device to TV refer to the user manual of the applicable device You should use the Bluetooth device supporting A2ZDP as external device Press any key to finish e Press the 1 or button to adjust the volume e If you wish to switch the sound off press the MUTE button e Press the BACK button to return to normal TV viewing NOTE gt You cannot listen to music while using the Bluetooth headset gt You cannot listen to music while receiving image s HLOOLAN 18 Y ASN OL i 85 NI YNI Ge i 86 3D IMAGING Only 42 47LX6 47 55LX9 50 60PX9 3D TECHNOLOGY This TV can display in 3D via 3D broadcasting or when the TV is connected to a compatible device such as a Blu ray 3D Player You need such a device to watch the TV in 3D The 3D TV displays two separate pictures formatted for each eye The viewer needs to wear 3D glasses in order to see these images in 3D format Viewing 3D Imaging A WARNING gt When viewing 3D images it is important t
203. imiting the foregoing unless expressly authorized by the applicable content owner or service provider you may not copy upload post transmit translate sell modify create derivative works or distribute in any manner or medium any content or services displayed through this device YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT THE DEVICE AND ALL THIRD PARTY CONTENT AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED LG ELECTRONICS EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO ANY CONTENT AND SERVICES Select Legal Notice e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing IMPORTANT NOTICE RELATING TO NETWORK SERVICES All content and services accessible through this device belong to third parties and are protected by copyright patent trademark and or other intellectual property laws Such content and services are provided solely for your personal noncommercial use You may not use any content or services in a manner that has not been authorized by the content owner or service provider Without limiting the foregoing unless expressly authorized by the applicable content owner or service provider you may not copy upload post transmit translate sell modify create derivative works or distribute in any manner or medium any content or services displayed through this device YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT THE DEVICE AND ALL THIRD PARTY CONTENT AND SERVICES
204. ired quick menu source Aspect Ratio Clear Voice II Picture Mode Sound Mode Audio or Audio Language Sleep Timer Skip Off On USB Device gt p 30 THUMBSTICK Allows you to navigate the on screen menus and Up Down LefyRight adjust the system settings to your preference OK Accepts your selection or displays the current T Ga moe Allows the user to move return one step in an inter Ca O E active application EPG or other user interaction Madeon i Le Clears all on screen displays and returns to TV BACK EXIT f viewing from any menu GUIDE Shows programme guide gt p 129 D Zo INFO Shows the present screen information o C C GD e AD Switches the Audio Description On or Off a APP Select the MHP TV menu source Only Italy A 53 Only 50 60PK78 50 60PK98 PREPARATION ENERGY AVMODE INPUT ve LIGHT ENERGY AVMODE INPUT Vea O CA 0 to 9 number Selects a programme SANG button Selects numbered items in a menu Space Opens an empty space on the screen keyboard LIST Displays the programme table gt p 55 Q VIEW Returns to the previously viewed programme 0 Cav ae Sas P DELETE MUTE Coloured These buttons are used for teletext on TELETEXT buttons models only Programme edit NOILVdVvdsdd E lt nop T FREEZE Pause the present picture at the screen It doesn t work at USB Mode and Simplink The TV returns to normal viewing automatically if no si
205. is tribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 13 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new prob lems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Library does not specify a license version number you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 14 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 15 BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICE
206. ith with m Install two 1 5 V AAA batteries Do not mix old or used batter les with new ones m Close cover m To remove the batteries perform the installation actions in reverse Simple Remote Control only 50 60PK9 50 60PX9 POWER Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby TV INPUT External input mode rotate in regular sequence gt p 57 POWER TV INPUT NOILVaVvdsdd 7 VOLUME UP Adjusts the volume x DOWN 4 a P MUTE Switches the sound on or off NY Programme Selects a programme UP DOWN O to 9 number Selects a programme button Selects numbered items in a menu 4 5 6 21010 x 0 om OK Accepts your selection or displays the current mode Returns to the previously viewed programme Installing Batteries a m Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install the batteries an matching correct polarity with with m Install two 1 5V AAA batteries Do not mix old or used batteries with new ones m Close cover m To remove the batteries perform the installation actions in reverse A 59 EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP m Io prevent damage do not connect to the mains outlet until all connections are made between the devices ANTENNA CONNECTION m For optimum picture quality adjust antenna direction m An antenna cable and converter are not supplied Wall Multi family Dwellings Apartments Antenna Connect to wall antenna socket
207. ith applicable wireless devices gt Because applicable wireless devices have the possibility of electromagnetic wave interference they cannot provide services related to human life gt You can only connect one Bluetooth device at a time gt You cannot receive photos only JPEG or listen to music from other Bluetooth devices while using the Bluetooth headset gt For details of Bluetooth refer to the user manual of the Bluetooth device gt Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device gt Bluetooth can be used about 30 seconds after the power is turned on gt Depending on the transmission processing method and performance of the headset used the audio can be instantly disconnected QDID Qualified Design Identity BO15199 SETTING THE BLUETOOTH If you want to listen to the broadcasted sound using the Bluetooth headset or receive the jpeg images from an external device and view them on the TV listen to music from cell phone Bluetooth device you can use the wireless communication without having to connect any cables You can use the BLUETOOTH menu by selecting Bluetooth on If you do not want to use the Bluetooth function select Bluetooth off If it is connected to the external Bluetooth device you can select Bluet
208. ith this product Also you can obtain the translation of GPL LGPL licenses from http www gnu org licenses old licenses gpl 2 0 translations html http www gnu org licenses old licenses Igpl 2 1 translations html This product includes other open source software m boost C software developed by http www boost org distributed under the Boost Software License Version 1 0 m C ares copyright 1998 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology m expat e copyright 1998 1999 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper e copyright 2001 2007 Expat maintainers fontconfig copyright 2001 2003 Keith Packard freetype copyright 2003 The FreeType Project www freetype org ICU copyright 1995 2008 International Business Machines Corporation and others libcurl copyright 1996 2008 Daniel Stenberg libjpeg This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group copyright 1991 1998 Thomas G Lane libmng copyright 2000 2007 Gerard Juyn Glenn Randers Pehrson libpng copyright 1998 2008 Glenn Randers Pehrson libupnp copyright 2000 2003 Intel Corporation libxml2 copyright 1998 2003 Daniel Veillard libxslt copyright 2001 2002 Daniel Veillard lua interpreter copyright 1994 2008 Lua org PUC Rio md5 copyright 1991 2 RSA Data Security Inc openSSL e cryptographic software written by Eric Young e software written by Tim Hudson e soft
209. ket that is mounted on the wall Use a sturdy rope to tie the product for align ment It is safer to tie the rope so it becomes horizontal between the wall and the product NOTE gt When moving the TV undo the cords first gt Use a platform or cabinet strong and large enough to support the size and weight of the TV gt To use the TV safely make sure that the height of the bracket on the wall and on the TV is the same m he TV can be installed in various ways such as on a wall or on a desktop etc m he TV is designed to be mounted horizontally NOTE gt Should Install wall mount on a solid wall per pendicular to the floor EARTHING gt Should use a special wall mount if you want l 2 to install it to ceiling or slanted wall Ensure that you connect the earth wire to prevent p The surface that wall mount is to be mount NOILVdVvdsdd 7 possible electric shock If grounding methods are ed on should be of sufficient strength to sup not possible have a qualified electrician installa _ port the weight of TV set e g concrete nat er ural rock brick and hollow block separate circuit breaker Bice i AA 7 Do not try to earth the TV by connecting it to tele _ the START ee cat E i phone wires lightening rods or gas pipes refer to the instructions included with the 3 mount Power _ LG is not liable for any accidents or damage i property or TV due to incorrect installa ion Where a non comp
210. l mount on a solid wall per a pendicular to the floor P Should use a special wall mount if you want U EARTHING to install it to sling or slanted Wel za Ensure that you connect the earth wire to prevent The surface that wall mount is to be mount U possible electric shock If grounding methods are ed on should be of sufficient strength to sup gt not possible have a qualified electrician installa port the weight of TV set e g concrete nat my se te circuit break ural rock brick and hollow block maf ee _ pb Installing screw type and length depends on Do not try to earth the TV by connecting it to tele the eA E Wee E 2 phone wires lightening rods or gas pipes refer to the instructions included with the mount _ Power Supply gt LG is not liable for any accidents or damage i property or TV due to incorrect installa ion Where a non compliant VESA wall mount is used Incorrect fastening of screws to surface which may cause TV to fall and cause per sonal injury Not following the recommended Installation method Circuit breaker DESKTOP PEDESTAL INSTALLATION m Image shown may differ from your TV For adequate ventilation allow a clearance of 10 cm all around the TV VESA Standard WALL MOUNT HORIZONTAL iiai SS INSTALLATION E o OOOO ME ns 400 400 M6 4 Quantity m We recommend the use of a LG Brand wall mounting bracket when mounting the TV to
211. lass or the TV may fall gt Do not drag the TV The floor or the product may be damaged m Image shown may differ from your TV PROGRAMME Remote Control Sensor Intelligent Sensor Adjusts picture according to the sur rounding conditions Power Standby Indicator Can be adjusted using the Power Indicator in the OPTION menu NOILVdVvdsdd i A 37 PREPARATION BACK PANEL INFORMATION NOILVdaVvdsdd E A 38 m Image shown may differ from your TV E F 4 a ANTENMA IN Power Cord Socket This TV operates on an AC power The volt age is indicated on the Specifications ae gt pjp to 200 Never attempt to operate the TV on DC power LAN Network connection for AccuWeather Picasa YouTube etc Also used for video photo and music files on a local network OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT Connect digital audio to various types of equipment Connect to a Digital Audio Component Use an Optical audio cable RGB DVI Audio Input Connect the audio from a PC or DTV Euro Scart Socket AV1 Connect scart socket input or output from an external device to these jacks Component Input Connect a component video audio device to these jacks HDMI DVI IN Input Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN Or DVI VIDEO signal to HDMI DVI port with DVI to HDMI cable A CAUTION gt Use a product with the following thickness for optimal connection to HDMI cable Only
212. lays the programme table gt p 55 0 Q VIEW Returns to the previously viewed programme Fav EA 2 a w NOILVaVvdsdd 7 r Coloured These buttons are used for teletext on TELETEXT buttons models only Programme edit d SIMPLINK See a list of AV devices connected to TV When you toggle this button the Simplink menu appears at the screen gt p 62 Ca GE Direct access to your internet portal of entertainment and news services developed by Orange Only France GN TELETEXT These buttons are used for teletext BUTTONS For further details see the Teletext section gt p 177 Boece ereeeeseeeeeeeecee P SUBTITLE Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode A 43 PREPARATION LIGHT ENERGY AVMODE INPUT 0680 SAVING ed MARK FAV ba ama e MUTE VOLUME UP DOWN MARK NOILVdaVdsdd E FAV CHAR NUM RATIO mnor TU DELETE MUTE Programme UP DOWN PAGE UP DOWN SIMPLINK MY MEDIA Menu control buttons Go C Car v ce rary Adjusts the volume Select the input to apply the Picture Wizard settings Check and un check programmes in the USB menu Displays the selected favourite programme Shifts the Character or Number for NetCast menu Selects your desired Aspect Ratio of picture gt p 135 Deletes the entered character when entering the character on the screen keyboard Switches the sound on or off
213. lect Data Service be OPTION e Language Language e Country Ireland e Disability Assistance 7 kri e Power Indicator Y MHEG L Teletext e Data Service e Factory Reset e Set ID e Mode Settina al Home Use Select MHEG or Teletext e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen JOYLNOO ANWVESDOdd AL ONIHOLVM N 59 TOYLNOO ANWVESDOdd AL ONIHOLVM E 60 WATCHING TV PROGRAMME CONTROL MHP SERVICE Only 32 37 42LE48 32 37 42 47 55LE58 32 37 42 47 55LE78 42 47LE7380 42 47 55LE88 32 37 42LD48 32 37 42 47 55LD68 32 42 47LD78 32 37 42LD88 42 47LX68 47 55LX98 50 60PK78 90 60PK98 50 60PX98 This menu is enabled only in Italy and MHP services of the other contries may not work properly This function is Auto Start function of MHP Italian data broadcast Use in channel with MHP signal Data broadcast function may not be smooth due to situation from the broadcasting station 2 OPTION 2 OPTION e Language Language e Language Language e Country Italy e Country Italy e Disability Assistance e Disability Assistance e Power Indicator e MHP Auto start e Factory Reset e Set ID e Mode Settina e Power Indicator e MHP Auto start Off e Factory Reset e Set ID ad e Mode Settina Home Use a4 Home Use
214. lect Search headset re Select the desired Bluetooth headset Select the desired Bluetooth headset 3 PIN number Refer to the user manual A of the applicable device for the PIN number PFR Are Connect the Bluetooth headset e Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen 78 Connecting to Bluetooth headset already registered Bluetooth headsets are listed in the order most recently used with the headset currently in use listed at the top When connecting to the Bluetooth device already registered you can select and connect directly without any PIN validation d Exit fe Exit uJ Bluetooth Qj Bluetooth Bluetooth off 11 D Bluetooth off b S e i Disconnect b Search headset E My Info _ Remove device E My Info e After connecting using the Bluetooth headset the headset setting will be the Disconnected condi tion automatically when you turn off the power of the TV and then turn on e After connecting the Bluetooth headset the TV speaker is switched to Mute condition and the sound will only be generated from the headset e Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen HLOOLAN 18 Y ASN OL i HLOOLAN Td Y ASN OL E 80 TO USE A BLUETOOTH Disconnecting the Bluetooth headset during use de Exit d Exit yy
215. liant VESA wall mount is used Incorrect Feno screws to surface which may cause TV to fall and cause per sonal injury Not following the recommended Installation method Circuit a breaker DESKTOP PEDESTAL INSTALLATION m Image shown may differ from your TV For adequate ventilation allow a clearance of 10 cm all around the TV VESA Standard l A B Screw Quantity WALL MOUNT HORIZONTAL aauners 200 200 me 4 INSTALLATION DONE STAND m We recommend the use of a LG Brand wall mounting bracket when mounting the TV to a wall m Image shown may differ from your TV m We recommend that you purchase a wall mount After installing the TV you can adjust the TV set ing bracket which supports VESA standard _ manually to the left or right direction by 20 m LG recommends that wall mounting be per degrees to suit your viewing position formed by a qualified professional installer A 41 NOILVdVvdsdd E A 42 PREPARATION REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS When using the remote control aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV LIGHT ENERGY AVMODE INPUT g 00G SAVING MA A P t MOG CD Co ex v ce BACK e EXIT J E E C G3 CD CE OD Ca CL J er POWER LIGHT ENERGY SAVING AV MODE INPUT TV RAD NetCast THUMBSTICK Up Down Left Right OK GUIDE Switches the TV on from standby or off
216. linking with the Library A suitable mechanism is one that 1 uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user s computer system rather than copying library functions into the executable and 2 will operate properly with a modified version of the library if the user installs one as long as the modified version is interface compatible with the version that the work was made with XIGNAddV 7 N 17 XIGNAddV i 218 APPENDIX c Accompany the work with a written offer valid for at least three years to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a above for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution d If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place e Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy For an executable the required form of the work that uses the Library must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it However as a special exception the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable It may happen that t
217. ly set the sound combination which it deems the best for the images being watched Selects your desired Sound Mode J Exit QD Display each menu Select your desired Source Audio or Audio Language Selects the sound output Sleep Timer Sets the sleep timer Skip Off On Selects the Skip Off On USB Device Selects Eject in order to eject USB device e Press the Q MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen ON SCREEN MENUS SELECTION AND ADJUSTMENT Your TV s OSD On Screen Display may differ slightly from that shown in this manual Display each menu e Press the RED button you can check the Customer Support menu e Press the GREEN button you can check Select a menu item the Simple Manual menu ws e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing Move to the pop up menu e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen NOTE gt It is possible to use ISM Method in Plasma TV models only gt It is possible to use Backlight Power Indicator in LCD TV LED LCD TV models only gt It is not possible to use Cl Information in Analogue mode J PICTURE rr La e Auto Tuning e Manual Tuning PICTURE Programme Edit L e Aspect Ratio 16 9 e Picture Wizard eed Energy Saving Off e Picture Mode Standard e Backlight 0 E e Contrast 100 m e Brightness 50
218. maged m Image shown may differ from your TV Only 32 37 42 47 55LD6 C gt MENU Oe meur POWER Power Standby Indicator Can be adjusted using the Power Indicator in the OPTION menu Remote Control Sensor Intelligent Sensor Adjusts picture according to the surrounding conditions A 16 Only 32 42 47LD7 Intelligent Sensor Adjusts picture according to _ See gt the surrounding conditions E Remote Control Sensor Power Standby Indicator Can be adjusted using the Power Indicator in the OPTION menu NOILVaVvdsdd 7 A 17 PREPARATION Only 32 37 42LD8 Q P le PROGRAMME amp a VOLUME DK i e 0K MENU Co MENU H e INPUT Gl E l POWER NOILVHYdJ d E SPEAKER Remote Control Sensor Intelligent Sensor Adjusts picture according to the surrounding conditions Power Standby Indicator Can be adjusted using the Power Indicator in the OPTION menu PROGRAMME Remote Control Sensor Power Standby Indicator Can be adjusted using the Power Indicator in the OPTION menu A 18 BACK PANEL INFORMATION m Image shown may differ from your TV COMPONENT LAN Bart ADON ANA gt m m GeO RGB lt AVOID OUT Gale a e go RGB IN PC L y EN oe HOM IN m e ANTENNA IN nly 1 32 37 42LD4 s Power Cord Socket This TV
219. may be damaged Cover SWIVEL STAND m Image shown may differ from your TV After installing the TV you can adjust the TV set manually to the left or right direction by 20 degrees to suit your viewing position 32 37 42LD6 32 42LD 7 32 37 42LD8 ATTACHING THE TV TOA DESK only 32 37 42LD4 m Image shown may differ from your TV The TV must be attached to desk so it cannot be pulled in a forward backward direction potentially Causing injury or damaging the product Use only an attached screw NOILVaVvdsdd 7 NOT USING THE DESK TYPE STAND m Image shown may differ from your TV When installing the wall mounted unit use the protection cover Insert the Protection Cover into the TV until clicking sound Protection Cover Stand AUAA WARNING gt To prevent TV from falling over the TV should be securely attached to the floor wall per installation instructions Tipping shaking or rocking the machine may cause injury A 21 NOILVdaVvdsdd E A 22 PREPARATION KENSINGTON SECURITY SYSTEM m This feature is not available for all models m Image shown may differ from your TV The TV is equipped with a Kensington Security System connector on the back panel Connect the Kensington Security System cable as shown below For the detailed installation and use of the Kensington Security System refer to the user s guide provided with the Kensington Security S
220. merica any litigation relating to this License shall be subject to the jurisdiction of the Federal Courts of the Northern District of California with venue lying in Santa Clara County California with the losing party responsible for costs including without limitation court costs and reasonable attorneys fees and expenses The application of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is expressly excluded Any law or regulation which provides that the language of a contract shall be construed against the drafter shall not apply to this License 12 RESPONSIBILITY FOR CLAIMS As between Initial Developer and the Contributors each party is responsible for claims and damages arising direct ly or indirectly out of its utilization of rights under this License and You agree to work with Initial Developer and Contributors to distribute such responsibility on an equitable basis Nothing herein is intended or shall be deemed to constitute any admission of liability 13 MULTIPLE LICENSED CODE Initial Developer may designate portions of the Covered Code as Multiple Licensed Multiple Licensed means that the Initial Developer permits you to utilize portions of the Covered Code under Your choice of the NPL or the alter native licenses if any specified by the Initial Developer in the file described in Exhibit A EXHIBIT A Mozilla Public License The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public L
221. n The TV time is set by the time offset information based on Time Zone and GMT Greenwich Mean Time which is received with the broadcast signal and the time is set automatically by a digital signal When if the city name in Time Zone is changed into offset you can change time by 1 hour Time Zone menu can be changed in Auto mode e Off Time gt Ov e On Time Off Date Month e Sleep Timer Year Hour Minute Time Zone London GMT e On Time ES e Sleep Timer Off Close TO Select TIME Time Zone Magadan Kamchatka Vladivostok Select Clock Yakutsk Irkutsk Select Auto or Manual CENOVA Omsk Yekaterinburg Select either the year month date Moscow Samara 2 time or Time Zone option Kaliningrad o Set the year month date time or Time This Table means the Time Zone table of 9 Zone option area of Russia and when the user selects the Time Zone for his or her area it automatically sets the time for the corresponding area However even though the user selected his or her area if the broadcasting station s local time offset is not offered or if the region information does not match then the user may select the Offset from the Time Zone to set the correct time e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen 169 ONILLAS AWIL I 170 TIME SETTING AUTO ON OFF TIME SETTI
222. n a USB or PC storage device The movie list is activated once USB is detected It is used when playing movie files on TV Displays the movies in the USB folder and supports Play Allows playback of all movies in the folder and user desired files It is a movie list that displays folder information and movie file The On Screen Display may be different from your TV Images are an example to assist with the TV operation Movie mpg mpeg dat ts trp tp vob mp4 mov mkv dvix avi asf wmv avi motion jpeg mp4 motion jpeg mkv motion jpeg supporting file Video format DivX3 11 DivX4 12 DivX5 x DivX6 Xvid1 00 Xvid1 01 Xvid1 02 Xvid1 03 Xvid1 10 beta 1 beta 2 Mpeg 1 Mpeg 2 Mpeg 4 H 264 AVC VC1 JPEG Sorenson H 263 Audio format Dolby Digital AAC Mpeg MP3 LPCM HE AAC ADPCM WMA Bit rate within 32 kbps to 320 kbps MP3 External Subtitle format smi srt sub MicroDVD Subviewer1 0 2 0 ass ssa txt TMPlayer psb PowerDivx Internal Subtitle format only XSUB It is the subtitle format used in DivX6 files e Some user created subtitles may not work properly e Some special characters are not supported in subtitles e HTML tags are not supported in subtitles e Subtitles in languages other than the supported languages are not available e Changing font and colour in subtitles is not supported e Subtitles in languages other than one specified are not supported e Video files wit
223. n files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable However as a special excep tion the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 4 You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 5 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permis sion to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Program or any w
224. n the date Contributor first makes Commercial Use of the Covered Code d Notwithstanding Section 2 2 b above no patent license is granted 1 for any code that Contributor has delet ed from the Contributor Version 2 separate from the Contributor Version 3 for infringements caused by i third party modifications of Contributor Version or ii the combination of Modifications made by that Contributor with other software except as part of the Contributor Version or other devices or 4 under Patent Claims infringed by Covered Code in the absence of Modifications made by that Contributor 3 Distribution Obligations 3 1 Application of License The Modifications which You create or to which You contribute are governed by the terms of this License including without limitation Section 2 2 The Source Code version of Covered Code may be distributed only under the terms of this License or a future version of this License released under Section 6 1 and You must include a copy of this License with every copy of the Source Code You distribute You may not offer or impose any terms on any Source Code version that alters or restricts the applicable version of this License or the recipients rights hereunder However You may include an additional document offering the additional rights described in Section 3 5 3 2 Availability of Source Code Any Modification which You create or to which You contribute must be made available in Source Code form
225. n to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen Fine tune for the best picture ARa PROGRAMME EDIT When a programme number is skipped it means that you will be unable to select it using P w button during TV viewing If you wish to select the skipped programme directly enter the programme number with the NUMBER buttons or select it in the Programme edit menu This function enables you to skip the stored programmes You can change the programme number using Move function if Automatic Numbering is unchecked when you start Auto Tuning SETUP e Auto Tuning e Manual Tuning e Programme Edit e Booster e Cl Information Select SETUP Enter the Programme Edit IS skipped tT rr Select Programme Edit Y Y Programme Edit Favourite Group Page 1 2 YLE TV1 801 YLE TV2 802 YLE FST YLE24 804 YLE Teema 805 TV4 Stockholm 806 Kanal Lokal 807 CNN 808 TV4 TV4 Plus 810 TV400 811 TV4 Film TV4 Fakta 813 MediaCorp HD5 814 SNY_SSU Demo 816 TVE 1 817 TVE 2 24H TVE 819 CLAN 50 TVE 820 LA7 v Pr Change Favourite Pr Favourite Pr Group Je Previous Pe Page Change Block Unblock E Skip or Programme Edit Favourite Group Page 1 2 Cable DTV YLE TV1 801 YLE TV2 802 YLE FST YLE24 804 YLE Teema 805 TV4 Stockholm 806 Kanal Lokal 807 CNN 808 TV4 TV4 Plus 810 TV400 811 TV4
226. nal hard disk with a Energy Saving function does not work turn the hard disk off and on again to make it work properly gt USB storage devices below USB 2 0 are supported as well But they may not work properly in the movie list gt Maximum of 999 folders or files can be recognized under one folder gt f there are too many folders and files in one folder it may not operate properly JDIAAG Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL i 91 AJDIAAG Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL i 92 TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE DLNA About DLNA This TV can display and play many types of movie photo and music files from your DLNA server and has been certified by DLNA for photos The Digital Living Network Alliance DLNA is a cross industry organization of consumer electronics computing industry and mobile device companies Digital Living provides consumers with easy sharing of digital media through a wired or wireless network in the home The DLNA certification logo makes it easy to find products that comply with the DLNA Interoperability Guidelines This unit complies with DLNA Interoperability Guidelines v1 5 When a PC running DLNA server software or other DLNA compatible device is connected to this TV some setting changes of software or other devices may be required Please refer to the operating instructions for the software or device for more information Please refer to pages 93 to 127 for additional information on supported file types and other instructions
227. nal supplied to the TV Energy Saving is disabled while playing in 3D For MPO files 3D camera files the 3D imaging mode is enabled automatically gt If you d like to play the BGM using mpo file 3D camera file In advance the contents path for BGM should be set on full sized photo view screen which isn t mpo file 3D camera file LCD TV LED LCD TV only Picture mode is set as Standard Energy Saving Off if entering to 3D mode LCD TV LED LCD TV only NOTES FOR VIEWING 3D IMAGE WITH 3D BROADCASTING In Analog TV 3D Imaging does not work When switching the 2D image display to the Di sable the 3D imaging mode with the 3D button 3D image display with the 3D button on the ids remote control the overlapped image may be The 3D imaging mode is disabled automatically if displayed you change the channel tet This channel supports the 3D imaging mode TASEEN ONE ne Select the 3D imaging type displayed on the left right or top bottom when AA ging TYP p ay ou chanae the channel ay screen by pressing the 3D button on the remote 7 i control AE E ET EEE EEE E Clune Press the L R SELECT button on the remote con E y trol and select L R or R L which you find better for while viewing 3D images ae l viewing 3D images NI YNWI dE i 89 AJDIAAG Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL i TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE WHEN CONNECTING A USB DEVICE When you connect a USB device this pop up menu is displayed automati
228. ng guide Select AV2 input source using the INPUT but ton on the remote control If connected to AV IN 3 select AV3 input source NOTE gt If you have a mono VCR connect the audio cable from the VCR to the AUDIO L MONO jack of the TV Camcorder Camcorder Video Game Set dNLAS LNAWdINOA WNYsALXS f dNLAS LNAWdINOA WNYsALXS i EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP CONNECTING WITH A D SUB 15 PIN CABLE This TV provides Plug and Play capability meaning that the PC adjusts automatically to the TV s set tings AUDIO IN D Connect the RGB output of the PC to the RGB IN PC jack on the TV Connect the PC audio output to the AUDIO IN RGB DVI jack on the TV Select RGB input source using the INPUT but ton on the remote control INSERTION OF A CI MODULE To view the encrypted pay services in digital TV mode This feature is not available in all countries D Insert the CI Module to PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Association CARD SLOT of TV as shown For further information see p 48 FWRSUSLIA CARD SLOTT Check this point as NOTE shown and insert the CI gt Check if the CI module is inserted into the PCMCIA card slot moo in the right direction If the module is not inserted properly this can cause damage to the TV and the PCMCIA card slot HEADPHONE SETUP Except for 50 60PK5 50 60PK7 50 60PK9 50 60PX9 42 47LX6 47 55LX9 Y
229. nu is Off the message to change it to On appears When new Software is available when connected to Internet the following message will be displayed New software version is ready Do you want to update it Starting Update Remind me later During Progress of a Software Update please note the following e Power to the TV must not be interrupted e After Software Update you can confirm the updated software version in Software Update menu e It may take hours to download the software so make sure that the power stays on during the download lt Simple Update Schedule Update gt e The antenna must not be disconnected e The software is downloaded only in Standby mode or in MUX with Software Update Service and stops when the power cord is unplugged or when viewing MUX without Software Update Service e When you return to Standby mode or MUX with Software Update Service the software download will resume from where it stopped lt Network Update gt e You do not disconnect the network while the software is being updated e When there is a new software update when you open NetCast you will not be able to use NetCast with out updating the software e You cannot open NetCast while the software is being updated PICTURE SOUND TEST This function is a customer support function that can execute picture and sound tests O Software Update yv Picture Test Do you have a problem in this test screen O Sound Tes
230. o watch the TV from an effective viewing angle and within the appropriate distance The appropriate angle is 120 when the viewing distance is 2m 6 5 ft and distance is 2m 7m 6 5ft 22 9ft If you exceed this viewing angle or distance you may not be able to view the 3D imaging Further 3D images may not be displayed if they are viewed while you are lying down LCD TV LED LCD TV only gt If you watch the 3D images too closely or for a long period of time it may harm your eyesight If you feel any sort of eyestrain stop viewing the 3D Images remove the 3D glasses and rest Watching the TV or playing video games that incor porate 3D images with the 3D glasses for a long period of time can cause drowsiness headaches or fatigue to you and or your eyes If you experi ence any of these symptoms stop viewing the 3D TV remove the 3D glasses and rest Pregnant woman seniors persons with heart problems or persons who experience frequent drowsiness should refrain from watching 3D TV gt Do not use the 3D imaging or 3D glasses whilst walking or moving around Using the 3D imaging and glasses while moving around may result in injuries due to run ning into objects tripping and or falling gt Some 3D imaging may cause you to duck or dodge the image displayed in the video Therefore it is best if you do not watch 3D TV near fragile objects or near any objects that can be knocked over easily gt Pleas
231. odels Lightly wipe any stains or fingerprints on the surface of the TV with the polish ing cloth Ferrite Core O This item is not included Polishing Cloth Do not use excessive for all models Power Cord Polishing cloth for force This may cause use on the screen scratching or discoloura tion Sy or caw M4x20 Only AATAL DnS Protection cover Bolts for stand assembly 39 37 A2LD6 32 42LD7 32 37 42LD8 Use of ferrite core This feature is not available for all models Ferrite core can be used to reduce the electromagnetic S r A wave when connecting the power cord A h The closer the location of the ferrite core to the power j i gt plug the better it is rE Install the power plug closely NOILVaVvdsdd 7 A 15 PREPARATION FRONT PANEL CONTROLS NOTE gt TV can be placed in standby mode in order to reduce the power consumption And TV should be switched off using the power switch on the TV if it will not be watched for some time as this will reduce energy consumption The energy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the level of brightness of the picture is reduced and this will reduce the overall running cost NOILVdaVvdsdd E 4 CAUTION gt Do not step on the glass stand or subject it to any impact It may break causing possible injury from frag ments of glass or the TV may fall gt Do not drag the TV The floor or the product may be da
232. of the Library and therefore falls outside the scope of this License However linking a work that uses the Library with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library because it contains portions of the Library rather than a work that uses the library The executable is therefore cov ered by this License Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables When a work that uses the Library uses material from a header file that is part of the Library the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library or if the work is itself a library The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law If such an object file uses only numerical parameters data structure layouts and accessors and small macros and small inline functions ten lines or less in length then the use of the object file is unrestricted regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6 Otherwise if the work is a derivative of the Library you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6 Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6 whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself 6 As an exception to the Sections
233. of up to 16 digits The TV PIN must have more than 1 digit d Exit d Exit Bluetooth Bluetooth w T My Info w 11 Bluetooth off Blueieonch Setup TV PIN 0000 oa Setup TV name GLOBAL PLAT2 PLT 510 sgh e760 N eo lg Search headset om Search headset TV address 00 05 c9 51 06 f3 Close Remove device E My Info gt am e Press the DELETE button to delete digits Select My Info Select Setup TV PIN or Setup TV name You can use an the alphabet A to Z the number 0 to 9 and blank e Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen HLOOLAN IE Y ASN OL i 83 HLOOLAN Td Y ASN OL N 84 TO USE A BLUETOOTH RECEIVING PHOTOS FROM EXTERNAL BLUETOOTH DEVICE For details on how to send photos only JPEG from the external Bluetooth device to TV refer to the lA user manual of the applicable device a Receiving picture s di Cancel e When you select Hide with the 4 v lt gt button the OSD will disappear And when you press the OK button again it will appear again e Select the desired photos Rotate Rotate photos m Rotates the photo 90 clockwise upon OK button on Rotate e The maximum accumulated size of the image s that can be received is 10MBytes e You cannot receive the image s while using the Bluetooth headset e You cannot receive the
234. om your TV After installing the TV you can adjust the TV set manually to the left or right direction by 20 degrees to suit your viewing position CAREFUL INSTALLATION ADVICE m You should purchase necessary components to fix the TV safety and secure to the wall on the market _m Position the TV close to the wall to avoid the possibility of it falling when pushed _m The instructions shown below are a safer way to set up the TV by fixing it to the wall avoid ing the possibility of it falling forwards if pulled This will prevent the TV from falling forward and causing injury This will also prevent the TV from damage Ensure that children do not climb or hang from the TV NOILVaVvdsdd 7 Use the eye bolts or TV brackets bolts to fix the product to the wall as shown in the picture If your TV has bolts in the eyebolts loosen then bolts Insert the eye bolts or TV brackets bolts and tighten them securely in the upper holes Secure the wall brackets with the bolts on the wall Match the height of the bracket that is mounted on the wall Use a sturdy rope to tie the product for align ment It is safer to tie the rope so it becomes horizontal between the wall and the product NOTE gt When moving the TV undo the cords first gt Use a platform or cabinet strong and large enough to support the size and weight of the TV gt To use the TV safely make sure that the height o
235. on a PC This port is used for Service or Hotel mode Antenna Input Connect antenna or cable to this jack USB Input Connect USB storage device to this jack PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Association Card Slot Insert the CI Module to PCMCIA CARD SLOT This feature is not available in all countries Audio Video Input Connect audio video output from an external device to these jacks STAND INSTALLATION m Image shown may differ from your TV When assembling the desk type stand check whether the bolt is fully tightened If not tightened fully the product can tilt forward after the product installation If you tighten the bolt with excessive force the bolt can deviate from abrasion of the tightening part of the bolt Only 50PK5 Only 50PK7 50PK9 50PX9 Carefully place the TV screen side down on Carefully place the TV screen side down on a cushioned surface to protect the screen _ a cushioned surface to protect the screen from damage from damage NOILVaVvdsdd 7 Set the Stand Base on even floor Set the Stand Base on even floor Assemble the parts of the Stand Body Assemble the parts of the Stand Body with the Stand Base of the TV with the Stand Base of the TV r EN Ao Stand Body Stand Base Assemble the parts of the Cable Management Clip with the Stand Body o Cable Management Clip O Assemble the TV as shown Fix the 4 bolts securely u
236. on the Shared screen Click Add icon to open the Browse Folder window O Oo A W Select the folder containing the files you want to share The selected folder is added to the list of shared folders Click Start Server icon to start the server NOTE If the shared folders or files are not displayed on the TV click the folder on the Local Folders tab and click Rescan Folder at the More button gt Visit www nero com for more information and software tools Playing back shared contents You can display and play movie photo and music content stored on your computer or other DLNA media servers 1 Start the server on your computer or other device that connected on your home network O gt Select MY MEDIA gt Select Movie List Photo List or Music List SA E D Select the DLNA e Depending on the media server this TV may need to get the permission from x Ne the server If you want to re scan available media server press blue colour button NOTE gt To play the file on the media server the TV and the media server must be connected to the same access point gt Because the compatibility and available playback functions on the MY MEDIA menu are tested on the bundle DLNA server Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials environment file requirements and playback functions on the MY MEDIA may differ depending on media servers gt The file requirements on this page are not always com
237. ooth off after disconnecting the device Je Exit ws Bluetooth h Bluetooth on ae NETWORK BLUETOOTH MY MEDIA fo f ee Press OK to set programme settings et Customer Support ME Simple Manual Select BLUETOOTH Select Bluetooth on e Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen HLOOLAN IE Y ASN OL i TO USE A BLUETOOTH BLUETOOTH HEADSET When you select the Bluetooth headset you can listen to the TV sound in the Bluetooth headset through wireless communication You must pair it with any new Bluetooth device before the first use For details refer to the user manu al of the applicable device A maximum of 12 devices can be paired When the unit is searching for the Bluetooth headset other buttons except for the Stop OK button do not work Connecting a new Bluetooth headset You can only search for the new Bluetooth headset only in the Disconnected condition When you run the search it will show you the list of all Bluetooth headsets responding After new Bluetooth device is searched the PIN number is validated to connect the device For details refer to the user manual of the applicable device gt Fe Exit 5g Searching Bluetooth headset Bluetooth Bluetooth off 1 1 Search headset HLOOLAN 1d V ASN OL E My Info Stop searching Select BLUETOOTH OK Se
238. or cable to this jack USB Input Connect USB storage device to this jack PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Association Card Slot ea Cl Module to PCMCIA CARD This feature is not available in all countries A 29 PREPARATION STAND INSTALLATION BACK COVER FOR m Image shown may differ from your TV WIRE ARRANG EM ENT When assembling the desk type stand check whether the bolt is fully tightened If not tightened Image shown may differ trom your TV fully the product can tilt forward after the product l installation If you tighten the bolt with excessive Secure the power cord with the Cable force the bolt can deviate from abrasion of the __ Holder on the TV back cover tightening part of the bolt It will help prevent the power cable from being removed by accident NOILVdaVvdsdd E Carefully place the TV screen side down on a cushioned surface to protect the screen from damage _ o F F j if Cable Holder After connecting the cables as necessary Case eee install Cable Holder as shown and bundle the cables Assemble the parts of the Stand Body with the Stand Base of the TV At this time tighten the screws that hold the Stand Body on Stand Base Cable Holder Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in SWIVEL STAND the back of the TV m Image shown may differ from your TV _ After installing the TV you can adjust the TV set m
239. or picture shaking Poor reception on some channels Lines or streaks in pictures No picture when connecting HDMI Check to see if there is any object between the TV and the remote con trol causing an obstruction Ensure you are pointing the remote control directly at the TV m Ensure that the batteries are installed with correct polarity to to m Install new batteries m Is the sleep timer set Check the power control settings Has the Power supply been interrupted If the TV is switched on and there is no input signal it will switch off auto matically after 15 minutes Check whether the TV is switched on Try another channel The problem may be with the broadcast Is the power cord inserted correctly into the mains Check your antenna direction and or location Test the mains outlet by plugging another TV into the same outlet This is normal the image is muted during the TV startup process Please contact your service centre if the picture has not appeared after five minutes Adjust Colour in menu option m Allow a sufficient distance between the TV and the VCR m ry another channel The problem may be with the broadcast m Are the video cables installed properly Activate any function to restore the brightness of the picture m Station or cable channel experiencing problems tune to another station m Station signal is weak reposition the antenna to receive weaker stations m Check for source
240. ork based on the Program you indi cate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it 6 Each time you redistribute the Program or any work based on the Program the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License 7 lf as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the con ditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to sat isfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceabl
241. ot be recognized gt Please connect a USB storage device with the cable offered by the device maker gt Some USB storage devices may not be supported or operated smoothly gt File alignment method of USB storage device is similar to Window XP and filename can recognize up to 100 English characters gt Be sure to back up important files since data stored in a USB memory device may be damaged We will not be responsible for any data loss gt f the USB HDD does not have an external power source the USB device may not be detected So be sure to connect the external power source Please use a power adaptor for an external power source We do not guar antee an USB cable for an external power source gt If your USB memory device has multiple partitions or if you use a USB multi card reader you can use up to 4 partitions or USB memory devices gt If a USB memory device is connected to a USB multi card reader its volume data may not be detected gt If the USB memory device does not work properly disconnect and reconnect it gt How fast a USB memory device is detected differs from device to device gt f the USB is connected in Standby Mode specific hard disk will automatically be loaded when the TV is turned on gt The recommended capacity is 1 TB or less for a USB external hard disk and 32 GB or less for USB memory gt Any device with more than the recommended capacity may not work properly gt If a USB exter
242. ou can listen the sound through the headphone 2 To adjust the headphone volume press the 4 or button If you press the MUTE button the sound from the headphone is switched off NOTE gt AUDIO menu items are disabled when connecting a headphone gt When changing AV MODE with a headphone connected the change is applied to video but not to audio gt Optical Digital Audio Out is not available when connecting a headphone gt Headphone impedance 16 Q gt Max audio output of headphone 10 mW to 15 mW dNLAS LNAWdINOA WNYsSLXS f dNLAS LNAWdINOA WNYsALXS i 10 EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP DIGITAL AUDIO OUT SETUP Sending the TV s audio signal to external audio equipment via the Digital Audio Output Optical port If you want to enjoy digital broadcasting through 5 1 channel speakers connect the OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal on the back of TV to a Home Theater or amp D Connect one end of an optical cable to the TV Digital Audio Optical Output port 2 Connect the other end of the optical cable to the digital audio Optical input on the audio EET equipment Set the TV Speaker option Off in the AUDIO menu gt p 159 Refer to the external sa Wo audio equipment instruction manual for opera tion m gt Do not look into the optical output port Looking at the laser beam may damage your vision EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT WIRELESS CONNECTION Except for
243. ound output automati cally switches to the Home theater speaker but when the TV speaker is turned on the sound output the TV speaker gt Some menus in AUDIO are disabled when TV Speaker is set to Off JOYLNOOD ADVNONVT 8 ANNOS E 159 JOYLNOOD ADVNONVT 8 ANNOS E 160 SOUND amp LANGUAGE CONTROL DTV AUDIO SETTING IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY When different audio types exist in an input signal this function allows you to select the audio type you want auno e sound Mode Standard l Standara La e Infinite Sound Off 7 e Infinite Sound Off Treble 50 ME a Treble aes e Bass 50 E Bass 50 E e Reset Reset Y Auto Q 3 e Digital Audio Out PCM 3 e Digital Audio Out PCM i g e TV Speaker On e TV Speaker On Sl Audo Seting Auo O O O G DTV Audio Setting Auto MPEG Select AUDIO oS Select DTV Audio Setting rae Select Auto HE AAC Dolby Digital Dolby Digital or MPEG e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen e Auto Automatically outputs in the order HE AAC gt Dolby Digital gt Dolby Digital gt MPEG Except for Italy Ont fits lal outputs in the order HE AAC gt Dolby Digital gt MPEG gt Dolby Digital nly Italy e HE AAC Dolby Digital Dolby Digital MPEG Allows users to select the audio type they want ex If MPEG is selected MPEG is
244. ove to the previous menu screen 137 PICTURE CONTROL e ENERGY SAVING It reduces the TV s power consumption The default factory setting is adjusted to the comfortable level to be viewed at home You can increase the brightness of your screen by adjusting the Energy Saving level or by setting the Picture Mode When adjusting Energy Saving in MHEG MHP mode the Energy Saving setting is applied after MHEG MHP is finished Selecting Screen Off while tuned to a radio station channel will reduce power consumption LCD TV LED LCD TV only Plasma TV only L PICTURE LA PICTURE t N j Ba b e Aspect Ratio 16V e Aspect Ratio 16 9 e Picture Wizard o Auto oe s Picture vdizard Y Intelligent Sensor Q e 2 Energy Saving y Off x O e Energy Saving Intelligent maof sd o e acces Eg ea l an l poles la Brightness Jm Screen Of m Arpas E Screen Off ES Q gt Select PICTURE PO Select PICTURE VAD OK _ Select ea Energy Saving gt Select ed Energy Saving sy Saving E gy Saving Select Auto Except for Select Intelligent Sensor Off 32 37 42LD4 Off lt gt Minimum Medium lt lt Minimum Medium J Maximum or Screen Off e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing Maximum or Screen Off e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen oa JOYLNOO 3HNL ld i e When you select Screen Of
245. own may differ from your TV The TV is equipped with a Kensington Security System connector on the back panel Connect the Kensington Security System cable as shown below For the detailed installation and use of the Kensington Security System refer to the user s guide provided with the Kensington Security System For further information contact http www kens ington com the internet homepage of the Kensington company Kensington sells security systems for expensive electronic equipment such as note book PCs and LCD projectors NOTE gt The Kensington Security System is an optional accessory gt If the TV feels cold to the touch there may be a small flicker when it is turned on This is normal there is nothing wrong with TV gt Some minute dot defects may be visible on the screen appearing as tiny red green or blue spots However they have no adverse effect on the monitor s performance gt Avoid touching the LCD screen or holding your finger s against it for long periods of time Doing so may produce some temporary distortion effects on the screen CAREFUL INSTALLATION ADVICE m You should purchase necessary components to fix the TV safety and secure to the wall on the market Position the TV close to the wall to avoid the possibility of it falling when pushed m The instructions shown below are a safer way to set u
246. p the TV by fixing it to the wall avoid ing the possibility of it falling forwards if pulled This will prevent the TV from falling forward and causing injury This will also prevent the TV from damage Ensure that children do not climb or hang from the TV Use the eye bolts or TV brackets bolts to fix the product to the wall as shown in the picture If your TV has bolts in the eyebolts loosen then bolts Insert the eye bolts or TV brackets bolts and tighten them securely in the upper holes Secure the wall brackets with the bolts on the wall Match the height of the bracket that is mounted on the wall Use a sturdy rope to tie the product for align ment It is safer to tie the rope so it becomes horizontal between the wall and the product NOTE gt When moving the TV undo the cords first gt Use a platform or cabinet strong and large enough to support the size and weight of the TV gt To use the TV safely make sure that the height of the bracket on the wall and on the TV is the same NOILVaVvdsdd 7 A 7 NOILVdaVvdsdd E PREPARATION m he TV can be installed in various ways such as on a wall or on a desktop etc m he TV is designed to be mounted horizontally NOTE gt Should Install wall mount on a solid wall per pendicular to the floor EARTHING gt Should use a special wall mount if you want to install it to ceiling or slanted wall Ensure that you connect the earth wi
247. patible There may have some restrictions by file features and media server s ability gt Even the files that are not supported can be displayed in photo thumbnail or music thumbnail gt Movie thumbnail is not supported in DLNA Movie gt If there is an unplayable music file in the MY MEDIA menu the TV will skip the file and play next file gt The file information indicated on the screen may not always correct for music and movie files in MY MEDIA menu gt This TV only supports movie subtitle files supplied by Nero MediaHome 4 gt The subtitle file name and movie file name have to be the same and located at the same folder gt If subtitle files have been added after a directory has been indexed already the user has to remove and re add the folder to the list of shares gt The playback and operating quality of the MY MEDIA function may be affected by your home net work condition gt The files from removable media such as USB drive DVD drive etc on your media server may not share properly gt When playing the Media through DLNA connection it does not support the DivX file play which is protected by DRM gt Up to 200 folders in one folder and 999 including folders and files can be recognized gt If there are too many folders and files in one folder it may not operate properly JDIAAG Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL p AJDIAAG Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL i 96 TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE MOVIE LIST You can play movie files o
248. ponents to fix the TV safety and secure to the wall on the market Position the TV close to the wall to avoid the possibility of it falling when pushed m The instructions shown below are a safer way to set up the TV by fixing it to the wall avoid ing the possibility of it falling forwards if pulled This will prevent the TV from falling forward and causing injury This will also prevent the TV from damage Ensure that children do not climb or hang from the TV NOILVaVvdsdd 7 D Use the eye bolts or TV brackets bolts to fix the product to the wall as shown in the picture If your TV has bolts in the eyebolts loosen then bolts Insert the eye bolts or TV brackets bolts and tighten them securely in the upper holes Secure the wall brackets with the bolts on the wall Match the height of the bracket that is mounted on the wall Use a sturdy rope to tie the product for align ment It is safer to tie the rope so it becomes horizontal between the wall and the product NOTE gt When moving the TV undo the cords first gt Use a platform or cabinet strong and large enough to support the size and weight of the TV gt To use the TV safely make sure that the height of the bracket on the wall and on the TV is the same A 31 PREPARATION m he TV can be installed in various ways such as on a wall or on a desktop etc m Ihe TV is designed to be mounted horizontally NOTE gt Should Install wal
249. pported movie files 42LD650 ZC 42LD650N ZC 42LD680 ZC 42LD690 ZB 1024 0 mm x 685 0 mm x 261 0 mm 1024 0 mm x 621 0 mm x 76 8 mm 15 5 kg 13 9 kg AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 210 W 47LD650 ZC 47LD650N ZC 47LD680 ZC 47LD690 ZB 1137 0 mm x 758 0 mm x 270 0 mm 42LD651 ZB 42LD651N ZB 42LD681 ZB 42LD691 ZB 1024 0 mm x 685 0 mm x 261 0 mm 1024 0 mm x 621 0 mm x 76 8 mm 15 5 kg 13 9 kg AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 210 W 47LD651 ZB 47LD651N ZB 47LD681 ZB 47LD691 ZB 1137 0 mm x 758 0 mm x 270 0 mm 0 C to 40 C Less than 80 20 C to 60 C Less than 85 Refer to p 96 to 97 m The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement XIGNAddV 7 193 XIGNAddV i A 19 APPENDIX 55LD6 ae 55LD650 ZC 55LD650N ZC 55LD651 ZB 55LD651N ZB 55LD680 ZC 55LD690 ZB 55LD681 ZB 55LD691 ZB Dimensions l with stand 1329 0 mm x 872 0 mm x 330 0 mm 1329 0 mm x 872 0 mm x 330 0 mm Width x Height x Depth without stand with stand Weight a without stand Power requirement AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz Power Consumption 340 W 340 W 37LE4 Mitel a 32LE4800 ZB 37LE4800 ZB 32LE4900 ZB 37LE4900 ZB Dimensions with stand 786 0 mm x 559 0 mm x 221 0 mm 907 0 mm x 630 0 mm x 270 0 mm Width x Height x rnssseessstetnnasetnnneetnnsennnneesnnntennntecnnneennntecnnstesnnsesnnns
250. projectors NOTE gt The Kensington Security System is an optional accessory gt If the TV feels cold to the touch there may be a small flicker when it is turned on This is normal there is nothing wrong with TV gt Some minute dot defects may be visible on the screen appearing as tiny red green or blue spots However they have no adverse effect on the monitor s performance gt Avoid touching the LCD screen or holding your finger s against it for long periods of time Doing so may produce some temporary distortion effects on the screen CAREFUL INSTALLATION ADVICE m You should purchase necessary components to fix the TV safety and secure to the wall on the market Position the TV close to the wall to avoid the possibility of it falling when pushed m The instructions shown below are a safer way to set up the TV by fixing it to the wall avoid ing the possibility of it falling forwards if pulled This will prevent the TV from falling forward and causing injury This will also prevent the TV from damage Ensure that children do not climb or hang from the TV 1 Use the eye bolts or TV brackets bolts to fix the product to the wall as shown in the picture If your TV has bolts in the eyebolts loosen then bolts Insert the eye bolts or TV brackets bolts and tighten them securely in the upper holes Secure the wall brackets with the bolts on the wall Match the height of the brac
251. r children to watch It is available to use this function in Lock System On Enter a password to watch a blocked programme Programme Edit Favourite Group Page 1 1 LOCK 1 Nine Digital 2 Nine Digital HD 3 Nine Guide BEG sctrccuot 4 7 Digital 5 7 HD Digital 6 7 Digital 1 pains 7 7Digital2 8 7 Digital 9 7 Guide e Lock System On e Block Programme e Parental Guidance Blocking Off e Input Block e Key Lock Off i Irr Wi W Pr Change Navigation He Page Change Ja Previous Block Unblock or Programme Edit Favourite Group Page 1 1 Cable DTV 1 Nine Digital 2 Nine Digital HD 3 Nine Guide 4 7 Digital 5 7 HD Digital 6 7 Digital 1 i Pr Change Navigation a Page Change d Previous Block Unblock Select LOCK a u S D Select Lock System Z o gt Select Block Programme a O zZ Enter the Block Programme AO O Select a programme to be locked e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen 173 PARENTAL CONTROL RATINGS PARENTAL CONTROL IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY This function operates according to information from the broadcasting station Therefore if the signal has incorrect information this function does not operate A password is required to gain access to this menu This set is programmed to remember whi
252. rating 0 C to 40 C Temperature l nA Less than 80 Environment condition Operating Humidity j Storage Temperature 20 C to 60 C Storage Humidity Less than 85 Supported movie files Refer to p 96 to 97 m For the power supply and power consumption refer to the label attached to the product Digital TV Analogue TV DVB T PAL SECAM B G D K PAL I II DVB C SECAM L L VHF E2 to E12 UHF E21 to E69 CATV S1 to S20 HYPER S21 to S47 Television System Programme Coverage VHF UHF Maximum number of storable programmes External Antenna Impedance m The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement IR CODES This feature is not available for all models Code Hexa Function 9 Energy Saving OB FO 45 43 40 m 5B 02 14E FAV MARK CHAR NUM 09 MUTE DELETE 01 53 1A 72 63 YELLOW Key 61 BLUE Key L R SELECT TE SIMPLINK B1 BO BA 9F APP R C BUTTON R C BUTTON R C BUTTON R C BUTTON R C BUTTON R C BUTTON R C BUTTON R C BUTTON R C BUTTON R C BUTTON R C BUTTON is R C BUTTON R C BUTTON R C BUTTON 7 R C BUTTON R C BUTTON ss R C BUTTON R C BUTTON R C BUTTON R C BUTTON R C BUTTON R C BUTTON R C BUTTON R C BUTTON R C BUTTON R C BUTTON R C BUTTON R C BUTTON XIGNAddV i N 01 APPENDIX EXTERN
253. rchased TV are playable MY MEDIA Movie List Photo List T You must register your device to i play DivX protected videos gt Deactivation gt gt Registration code Je ji ee a Register at http vod divx com Music List d Previous Close Select MY MEDIA OS Select DivX Reg Code Display DivX Reg Code e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing ABOUT DIVX VIDEO DivX is a digital video format created by DivxX Inc This is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video Visit www divx com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video ABOUT DIVX VIDEO ON DEMAND This DivX Certified device must be reg istered in order to play DivX Video on Demand VOD content To generate the registration code locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu Go to vod divx com with this code to complete the registration process and learn more about DivX VOD DivX Certified to play DivX video up to HD 1080p including premium content Pat 7 295 673 7 460 668 7 515 710 7 519 274 NOTE gt Movie files are supported as follows Resolution under 1920x1080 WxH pixels Frame rate under 30 frames sec 1920x1080 under 60 frames sec under 1280x720 gt Video Codec MPEG 1 MPEG 2 MPEG 4 H 264 AVC DivX 3 11 DivX 4 12 DivX 5 x DivX 6 Xvid 1 00 Xvid 1 01 Xvid 1 02 Xvid 1 03 Xvid 1 10 beta1
254. re to prevent _p The surface that wall mount is to be mount possible electric shock If grounding methods are ed on should be of sufficient strength to sup not possible have a qualified electrician installa port the weight of TV set e g concrete nat separate circuit breaker ural rock brick and hollow block Do not try to earth the TV by connecting it to tele eran T rey Re l e EALE a phone wires lightening rods or gas pipes refer to the instructions included with the mount Power gt LG is not liable for any accidents or damage Supply to property or TV due to incorrect installa ion Where a non compliant VESA wall mount Circuit is used BY breaker Incorrect fastening of screws to surface which may cause TV to fall and cause per sonal injury Not following the recommended Installation method DESKTOP PEDESTAL INSTALLATION m Image shown may differ from your TV For adequate ventilation allow a clearance of 10 cm all around the TV Model VESA Standard WALL MOUNT HORIZONTAL Sioa i 32LE4 200 100 M4 4 INSTALLATION __ te ae fn Esm 366 400 nn fo E We recommend the use of a LG Brand wall 37 42 47LE5 200 200 ESAT M6 E ETA 4 EEREN mounting bracket when mounting the TV to a wall 5S aoa ee ee ee ereo nena that yoll curchaseawallmicunt ES chee re Aon ing bracket which supports VESA standard S2LETS S2LE 78 S2LE79 200 100 M4 A s DE A thatwall E
255. ress OK to view the list of photos in the USB or PC Option lt Exit eof The heiren SAVING CRYSTAL INVADER URGENT SURVIVAL m Image shown may differ from your TV Input List E input Label Only 32 37 42LE4 32 37 42 47 55LE5 42 47LE73 32 37142LD4 32 37 42 47 55LD6 32 42 47LD7 32 37 42LD8 42 47LX6 47 55LX9 50 60PK5 50 60PX9 AUTO PROGRAMME TUNING Use this to automatically find and store all available programmes When you start auto programming all previously stored service information will be deleted The maximum number of programmes that can be stored is 1 000 But the number may differ slightly depending on broadcasting signals DVB T DVB C Auto Tuning is a menu for users in countries that support DVB cable If you want to select the Antenna e Auto Tuning e Auto Tuning e Manual Tuning Please select your TV Connection Antenna e Manual Tuning e Programme Edit aes e Programme Edit sy e Booster e Booster CTS Check your antenna connection The previous channel information will be updated during Auto Tuning e Cl Information e Cl Information If you select antenna or cable existing channel information is deleted Cable Close E SECAM L Search BA Automatic Numbering Start Select SETUP e Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4 digit password in elec oF Lock
256. s in the eyebolts loosen then bolts Insert the eye bolts or TV brackets bolts and tighten them securely in the upper holes Secure the wall brackets with the bolts on the wall Match the height of the bracket that is mounted on the wall Use a sturdy rope to tie the product for align ment It is safer to tie the rope so it becomes horizontal between the wall and the product ONOTE gt When moving the TV undo the cords first gt Use a platform or cabinet strong and large enough to support the size and weight of the TV gt To use the TV safely make sure that the height of the bracket on the wall and on the TV is the same m Ihe TV can be installed in various ways such as on a wall or on a desktop etc m he TV is designed to be mounted horizontally NOTE gt Should Install wall mount on a solid wall per pendicular to the floor EARTHING gt Should use a special wall mount if you want to install it to ceiling or slanted wall Ensure that you connect the earth wire to prevent gt The surface that wall mount is to be mount possible electric shock If grounding methods are ed on should be of sufficient strength to sup not possible have a qualified electrician installa port the weight of TV set e g concrete nat separate circuit breaker ural rock brick and hollow block Do not try to earth the TV by connecting it to tele g e ng Screw oe Pe E epee en phone wires lightening rods or ga
257. s of possible interference Check that your HDMI cable is High Speed HDMI Cable lf the HDMI cables are not High Speed HDMI Cable flickering or no screen display can result Please use the High Speed HDMI Cable XIGNAddV 7 ma 81 APPENDIX The audio function does not work Press the 4 or button Picture OK amp No Sound muted Press MUTE button sound Try another channel The problem may be with the broadcast Are the audio cables installed properly No output from one of the speakers Unusual sound from A change in ambient humidity or temperature may result in an unusual noise inside the TV when the TV is switched on or off and does not indicate a fault with the TV m Check HDMI cable is High Speed HDMI Cable No sound when con i m Check USB cable over version 2 0 necting HDMI or USB This feature is not available for all models There is a problem in PC mode Only PC mode applied The signal is out of range Invalid format Vertical bar or stripe on background amp Horizontal Noise amp Incorrect position Screen colour is unstable or single colour m Adjust resolution horizontal frequency or vertical frequency Check the input source m Check the signal cable Reinstall the PC video card There is a problem with PICTURE settings When the user chang es the picture settings m It means that the TV is currently set to Store Demo mode the TV automatically To switch to Home use mode you should do
258. s pipes refer to the instructions included with the mount Power ALG is not liable for any accidents or damage R property or TV due to incorrect installa ion Where a non compliant VESA wall mount is used Incorrect aening He screws to surface which may cause TV to fall and cause per sonal injury Not following the recommended Installation method Circuit breaker DESKTOP PEDESTAL INSTALLATION m Image shown may differ from your TV For adequate ventilation allow a clearance of 10 cm all around the TV WALL MOUNT HORIZONTAL INSTALLATION m We recommend the use of a LG Brand wall VESA Standard mounting bracket when mounting the TV to a wall A 3 Screw Quantity m We recommend that you purchase a wall mount ing bracket which supports VESA standard S2LD4 200 100 on M4 PEENE E 4 EERE 3 37 42LD4 200 200 M6 4 m LG recommends that wall mounting be per SSS stern formed by a qualified professional installer 32LD6 200 100 M4 A S7 42 47LD6 200 200 M6 Aon SSLD6 400 7 400 M6 nn ae 200 100 M4 42I47LDi s 200 200 M6 4 S2LD8 200 100 M4 oo Fiabe 37 42LD8 200 200 M6 4 NOILVdVvdsdd 7 NOILVdVvdsdd E A 24 PREPARATION REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS When using the remote control aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV ENERGY AVMODE INPUT eg 0006 SAVING FAV ca HSD CA MUTE nr y MENU mea
259. s selected it is moved to selected programme and EPG disap pears When NEXT is selected a reservation pop up window appears Select NOW or NEXT Programme Select the Broadcast Programme Page Up Down Programme Guide That 70s show 25 Nov 2008 10 05 W DTV 1 YLE TV1 25 Nov 2008 09 45 10 15 ALL That 70s show 2 YLE TV2 Your World Toda Legenen om Den 5 YLEFST Naturtimmen Lyssna Glamour Favourite NAA O Information Watch Schedule axe RADIO E Mode Manual Timer E Schedule List OLO MWO Switch off EPG O O Select DTV or RADIO Programme Detail information on or off Button Function in 8 Day Guide Mode Change EPG mode Enter Date setting mode Enter Manual Timer mode Enter Schedule List mode When Currently broadcasting pro gramme is selected it is moved to selected programme and EPG disap pears When Future broadcasting programme is selected a reservation pop up window appears Select Programme Select the Broadcast Programme Programme Guide That 70s show 25 Nov 2008 10 05 E DTV 1 YLE TV1 25 Nov 2008 09 45 10 15 ALL Antigues Roadshow Kungskonsumente GN 2 YLE TV2 5 YLE FST E116 CNN Fashion Essentials 8 YLE24 K s T n n otsikoissa Favourite MEJ Information Watch Schedule RADIO Mode Date Manual Timer E Schedule List Page Up Down Detail information on or off JQO
260. signals gt When watching digital TV in 3D imaging mode monitor out signals cannot be output through the SCART cable Only 42 47LX6 47 55LX9 50 60PX9 gt If you set the 3D mode to On while a scheduled recording is performed on digital TV monitor out signals cannot be output through the SCART cable and the recording cannot be performed Only 42 47LX6 47 55LX9 50 60PX9 dNLAS LNAWdINOA WNYSLXS f dNLAS LNAWdINOA WNYsALXS i EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP USB SETUP Connect the USB device to the USB IN 1 or USB IN 2 jack on the TV After connecting the USB IN 1 or USB IN 2 jack you use the USB function p 90 CONNECTING WITH AN RF CABLE To avoid picture noise interference allow adequate distance between the VCR and TV Gp Connect the ANT OUT socket of the VCR to the ANTENNA IN socket on the TV o Connect the antenna cable to the ANT IN socket of the VCR Press the PLAY button on the VCR and match the appropriate channel between the TV and VCR for viewing Wall Jack Antenna CONNECTING WITH AN RCA CABLE D Connect the AUDIO VIDEO jacks between TV and VCR or external equipment Match the jack colours Video yellow Audio Left white and Audio Right red Insert a video tape into the VCR and press PLAY on the VCR Refer to the VCR owner s manual Or Operate the corresponding external equip ment Refer to external equipment operati
261. sing the holes in la the back of the TV Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in the back of the TV When assembling the stand make sure to distinguish and assemble the front and rear side of the stand correctly A 49 NOILVdaVvdsdd E A 50 PREPARATION BACK COVER FOR WIRE ARRANGEMENT m Image shown may differ from your TV Cable Holder as shown and bundle the cables In case of the LAN cable install as shown to reduce the electromagnetic wave Cable Holder Only 50 60PK7 50 60PK9 90 60PX9 1 Connect the cables as necessary To con nect additional equipment see the External Equipment Setup section Install the Cable Management Clip into the TV until clicking sound NOTE gt Do not use the Cable Management Clip to lift the TV If the TV is dropped you may be injured or the TV may be damaged HOW TO REMOVE THE CABLE MANAGEMENT CLIP After connecting the cables as necessary install Only 50 60PK7 50 60PK9 50 60PX9 m Image shown may differ from your TV Hold the Cable Management Clip with both hands and pull it backward as shown NOT USING THE DESK TYPE STAND m Image shown may differ from your TV When installing the wall mounted unit use the protection cover Insert the Protection Cover into the TV until clicking sound Protection Cover Fix a Guide to the Outsides SWIVEL STAND m Image shown may differ fr
262. sing the holes in the back of the TV BACK COVER FOR WIRE ARRANGEMENT m Image shown may differ from your TV FOR DESK TYPE STAND Install the Cable Management Clip as shown NOILVaVvdsdd 7 Cable Management Clip Connect the cables as necessary To con nect additional equipment see the External Equipment Setup section FOR WALL MOUNT After Connecting the cables as necessary install Cable Holder as shown and bundle the cables To connect additional equip ment see the External Equipment Setup section Cable Holder NOTE gt Do not use the Cable Management Clip to lift the TV If the TV is dropped you may be injured or the TV may be damaged A 39 NOILVdaVvdsdd E A 40 PREPARATION KENSINGTON SECURITY SYSTEM m This feature is not available for all models m Image shown may differ from your TV The TV is equipped with a Kensington Security System connector on the back panel Connect the Kensington Security System cable as shown below For the detailed installation and use of the Kensington Security System refer to the user s guide provided with the Kensington Security System For further information contact http www kens ington com the internet homepage of the Kensington company Kensington sells security systems for expensive electronic equipment such as note book PCs and LCD
263. ss the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen LED LOCAL DIMMING Only 32 37 42LE4 42 47 55LE5 42 47 55LE75 42 47 55LE78 42147 55LE79 42 47 55LE8 42 47LX6 47 55LX9 After analyzing the signal of the input video by areas of the screen it adjusts the backlight to improve the contrast ratio Ls PICTURE VUIVUI 0 Rume e Colour Temp 0O Em a e Advanced Control e Picture Reset a e TruMotion Off e Screen LED Local Dimming On L PICTURE e TruMotion e Screen WwVIVUl o RIMM Colour Temp O Em e Advanced Control e Picture Reset Off LED Local Dimming On e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen JOYLNOOD 3HNL ld g 149 JOYLNOO 3HNL ld i 150 PICTURE CONTROL POWER INDICATOR LCD TV LED LCD TV ONLY Adjust the power standby indicator light on the front of the TV Standby Light Determines whether to set the indicator light on the front of the TV to On or Off in standby mode Power Light Determines whether to set the indicator light on the front of the TV to On or Off when the power turns on If you select 3D mode Power indicator is turned off automatically gt lt OPTION e Language Language e Country UK P OPTION e Language Language e Country UK Disability Assistance t e Disability Assistance B r oo bet Standby Light
264. stallation actions in reverse A 11 PREPARATION REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS only 42 47LX6 When using the remote control aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV oe POWER Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby ENERGY AVMODE INPUT LIGHT You can turn the light of the remote control button D O on or off idi ENERGY Adjust the Energy Saving mode of the TV gt p 138 NOILVHYdJ d E SAVING AV MODE It helps you select and set images and sounds when connecting AV devices gt p 66 INPUT External input mode rotate in regular sequence ee oar TV RAD Selects Radio TV and DTV programme Eza aon A P e Selects a menu V4 Clears all on screen displays and returns to TV viewing from any menu p 31 NetCast Select the desired NetCast menu source gt p 68 AccuWeather Picasa YouTube and etc NetCast menu source can differ by country Select the desired quick menu source Aspect Ratio Clear Voice Il Picture Mode Sound Mode Audio or Audio Language Sleep Timer Skip Off On USB Device p 30 THUMBSTICK Allows you to navigate the on screen menus and Up DownlLefvRight adjust the system settings to your preference ETEXT T OPT OK Accepts your selection or displays the current CDEDED mode Cu C Allows the user to move return one step in an inter active application EPG or other user interaction function v d atk
265. stead of to this License If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared then you can specify that version instead if you wish Do not make any other change in these notices Once this change is made in a given copy it is irreversible for that copy so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library 4 You may copy and distribute the Library or a portion or derivative of it under Section 2 in object code or execut able form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above ona medium customarily used for software interchange If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 5 A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it is called a work that uses the Library Such a work in isolation is not a derivative work
266. synchronisation of the subtitle from 10 secs to 10 secs by steps of 0 5 secs during movie play gt Position Changes the position of the subtitle either up or down during movie play gt Size Selects your desired Subtitle size during movie play gt Repeat Turn on off repeat function of movie playback When turned on the file within the folder will be played back repeatedly Even when the repeated play back is turned off it can run the playback if the file name is similar to the previous file gt Only 10 000 of sync blocks can be supported within the subtitle file 104 gt When playing a video you can adjust the Picture Size by pressing the RATIO button m When you select the Set Video m Image shown may differ from your TV LCD TV LED LCD TV only PLASMA TV Only Set Video Picture Mode e Backlight e Contrast e Brightness 50 e Colour 60 e Dynamic Contrast e Edge Enhancer e Noise Reduction TruMotion NY Picture Reset a Standard gt ae gt a TT lt Medium lt High lt Medium lt Low gt d Previous Set Video Picture Mode e Contrast e Brightness e Sharpness e Colour e Tint e Colour Temp e Noise Reduction NY Picture Reset a Standard C bE O O d Previous J0IA3d Od YO 4SN Y ASN OL i 105 TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE m When you select the Set Audio Set Audio Sound Mode Auto Volume Clear Voice II
267. t Signal Test C Product Service Info r lt lt e P e OPTION J Network Test N Press OK to set programme settings a Customer Support O Simple Manual Select Customer Support Select Picture Test or Sound Test Select Yes or No TOYLNOO ANWWNVESDOdd AL QNIHOLVM E e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen 51 TOYLNOOD ANWVYSDOdd AL ONIHOLVM E RODK 52 WATCHING TV PROGRAMME CONTROL SIGNAL TEST This function enables you to view information on the Manufacturer Model Type Serial Number and Software Version This displays the information and signal strength of the tuned MUX This displays the signal information and service name of the selected MUX MUX A higher directory of channels in digital broadcasting a single MUX contains multiple chan nels Engineering Diagnostics Manufacturer LG Electronics Inc E Software Update Model Type 42LE7500 ZA Serial No SKJY1107 Software Version V00 00 01 r vi Signal Test gt Ch 30 ol O Ch34 ZZ Ch36 EE wy O Network Test Ch38 E Close Ch54 M Cheo E da Prev Popup Exit 1 hoe ey 2t C Product Service Info OPTION NETWORK BLUETOOTH MY MEDIA fa f e Press OK to set programme settings ii Customer Support O Simple Manual RED Select Customer Support Sel
268. t cause it when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copy right notice and a notice that there is no warranty or else saying that you provide a warranty and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions and telling the user how to view a copy of this License Exception if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regard less of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with t
269. t file with the Source Code distribution titled LEGAL which describes the claim and the party making the claim in sufficient detail that a recipient will know whom to contact If Contributor obtains such knowledge after the Modification is made available as described in Section 3 2 Contributor shall promptly modify the LEGAL file in all copies Contributor makes available thereafter and shall take other steps such as notifying appropriate mailing lists or newsgroups reasonably calculated to inform those who received the Covered Code that new knowledge has been obtained XIGNAddV 7 N 21 XIGNAddV i 222 APPENDIX b Contributor APIs If Contributor s Modifications include an application programming interface and Contributor has knowledge of patent licenses which are reasonably necessary to implement that API Contributor must also include this infor mation in the LEGAL file c Representations Contributor represents that except as disclosed pursuant to Section 3 4 a above Contributor believes that Contributor s Modifications are Contributor s original creation s and or Contributor has sufficient rights to grant the rights conveyed by this License 3 5 Required Notices You must duplicate the notice in Exhibit A in each file of the Source Code If it is not possible to put such notice in a particular Source Code file due to its structure then You must include such notice in a location such as a relevant directory where a
270. t the desired game Enter the selected game mode e Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing 128 EPG ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE IN DIGITAL MODE This system has an Electronic Programme Guide EPG to help your navigation through all the possible viewing options The EPG supplies information such as programme listings start and end times for all available services In addition detailed information about the programme is often available in the EPG the availability and amount of these programme details will vary depending on the particular broadcaster This function can be used only when the EPG information is broadcast by broadcasting companies You must set the Clock in the Time menu before using EPG function The EPG displays the programme details for 8 days DTV 1 TV ONE Pr Change Next Watch Good Morning 21 00 a 00 00 Show Game Show WJ 720 0 Sarah Bradley Steve Gray and Brendon Pongia present the latest in fashion the arts entertainment lifestyle and cooking with regular and special guests Sarah Bradley Steve Gray and Brendon Pongia present the latest in fashion the arts entertainment lifestyle and cooking Up ith r lar and snerial Bis y E Down Shows current programme information Displayed with a TV or DTV Programme Displayed with a Teletext Programme Displayed with a Radio Programme Displayed with a Subtitle Programme Displayed with a MHEG Programme mam Displayed
271. ta exchange With the Bluetooth communication function you can connect the Bluetooth enabled wireless headset or receive images only JPEG listen to music from the Bluetooth enabled cell phone using this TV e Communication Spec Bluetooth Specification Version 2 0 EDR Enhanced Data Rate e Output Bluetooth Specification Power Class 2 e Maximum Communication Range Line of open sight approx 10 m 30 ft e Frequency Band 2 4 GHz band 2 4 GHz to 2 4835 GHz e Bluetooth Module RBFS B921A Plasma TV RBFS B721A LCD LED LCD TV LG Electronics e Compatible Bluetooth Profile GAVDP Generic Audio Video Distribution Profile A2DP Advanced Audio Distribution Profile HSP Headset Profile OPP Object Push Profile BIP Basic Imaging Profile CE 0700 FTP File Transfer Profile Precautions when using the Bluetooth gt Use within 7 m 45 to 45 range gt f you use the device out of the range or within the range with obstacles it can result in communication error gt Communication error can occur depending on the surrounding devices gt Products using the same frequency of 2 4 GHz Wireless LAN microwave oven etc can cause communi cation error by using the same frequency bandwidth gt The device search time differs depending on the number of Bluetooth devices and the operating situation gt The probability of search increases with less number of devices gt Electromagnetic wave can be interfered w
272. tal Service cccccccceeeeeeees 180 APPENDIX TFOUDIGSNOOUNG rissccaseceosseccosencsenuebnnresetecereaneste 181 MaintenanCE bear cascennascecotaneesesceesccenasenaeeanats 183 Product Specifications ccceeceseeeeeeeeeeeees 184 IR COG OS siessen nnn EEEE E 201 External Control Device Setup 008 202 Open source software notice c ccceeeee 209 PREPARATION LED LCD TV MODELS 32 37 42LE4 32 37 42 47 55LE5 32 37 42 47 55LE75 32 37 42 47 55LE78 32 37 42 47 55LE79 42 47 55LE8 42 47LX6 ACCESSORIES Ensure that the following accessories are included with your TV If an accessory is missing please con tact the dealer where you purchased the TV m Image shown may differ from your TV Nero MediaHome Cable Holder NOILVaVvdsdd 7 Component gender cable AV gender cable A 4 Essentials CD Manual 4 x id m 7 1 screw for stand fixing Owner s Manual Batteries Remote Control ASSES Only 32LE4 This item is not included for all models Lightly wipe any stains or ue Shar roe ue ating cleansing cloths mitt ing cloth Only 32 37 42 47 55LE75 32 37 42 47 55LE78 Seca mane eee 30 37 4214 7ISSLE79 0 TPU S Do not use excessive Slightly wipe stained spot on the exterior only with Polishing cloth for force This may cause the cleansing cloths mitt for the product exterior if use on the screen scratching or discoloura there is stain or fing
273. tand without stand with stand Weight without stand Power requirement Power Consumption CI Module Size Width x Height x Depth Operating Temperature Environment condition Operating Humidity Storage Temperature Storage Humidity Supported movie files 42LE5500 ZA 42LE550N ZA 42LE5800 ZA 42LE5900 ZA 1016 0 mm x 692 0 mm x 270 0 mm 1016 0 mm x 630 0 mm x 29 3 mm 19 5 kg 16 7 kg AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 150 W 47LE5500 ZA 47LE550N ZA 47LE5800 ZA 47LE5900 ZA 1126 6 mm x 757 9 mm x 284 4 mm 42LE5510 ZB 42LE551N ZB 42LE5810 ZB 42LE5910 ZB 1016 0 mm x 692 0 mm x 270 0 mm 1016 0 mm x 630 0 mm x 29 3 mm 19 5 kg 16 7 kg AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 150 W 47LE5510 ZB 47LE5 51N ZB 47LE5810 ZB 47LE5910 ZB 1126 6 mm x 757 9 mm x 284 4 mm 0 C to 40 C Less than 80 20 C to 60 C Less than 85 Refer to p 96 to 97 m The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement XIGNAddV 7 185 APPENDIX WO B HRS Dimensions Width x Height x Depth with stand without stand with stand Weight eig without stand Power requirement Power Consumption WO DH RS Dimensions Width x Height x Depth with stand without stand with stand without stand Weight Power requirement Power Consumption CI Module Size Width x Height x Depth Operating SOLES 55LE5500 ZA 55LE550N ZA 55LE58
274. tc This digital teletext can access special digital teletext services and specific services which broadcast digital teletext TELETEXT WITHIN DIGITAL SERVICE ay Press the numeric or P v button to select a digital service which broadcasts digital teletext D Follow the indications on digital teletext and zw VU oo move onto the next step by pressing TEXT pea JOGGER STARTIN OK v lt gt RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE or NUMBER buttons and etc To change digital teletext service select a dif ferent service by the numeric or P v button TELETEXT IN DIGITAL SERVICE GD Press the numeric or P v button to select a certain service which broadcasts digital teletext Press the TEXT or coloured button to switch on 4 teletext occen stanam E E E E E A A T E E ET EBC Mews 24 Follow the indications on digital teletext and move onto the next step by pressing OK w lt gt RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE or NUMBER buttons and SO on Press the TEXT or colour button to switch off digital teletext and return to TV viewing SHORTCUTS BACK MENU BIRDIE Some services may allow you to access text ser vices by pressing the RED button APPENDIX TROUBLESHOOTING The TV does not operate properly The remote control does not work Power is suddenly turned off No picture amp No sound Picture appears slowly after switching on No or poor colour or poor picture Horizontal vertical bars
275. ter is used there may be restrictions for some functions dNLAS LNAWdINOA WNYsALXS f 23 dNLAS LNAWdINOA WNYsALXS i EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP Wireless Network Setup Setting up the AP Access Point or the wireless router is required before connecting the TV to the network If you already set the Network Setting NETWORK Select the wireless network setting type e Network Setting Wired Network Type e Network Status Internet is Previous setting value exists Do you want to connect with the previous setting Select the wireless network setting type Setting from the AP list Simple setting WPS button mode Setting Ad hoc network Next da Previous Wired network is recommended a Legal Notice OK Resetting Appeared when wired and wireless are simultaneously connected If your AP is locked Selecting AP Network Setting Inserting the security key Select AP you want to connect Select the IP setting mode IP Mode lt IP Auto Setting gt e IP Address 259r 259r OMO a e Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 S e Gateway ZOO wZOon ae e DNS Server 259m255 mONO OK Page 1 1 Input the new SSID pe iptime A i ii ASW p Insert the security key of AP Insert 8 63 ASCII characters Network Ghul Connecting with PIN mode da Previous da Previous Scan the all
276. the GNU C Library in non free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system as well as its variant the GNU Linux operating system XIGNAddV 7 N 15 APPENDIX Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users freedom it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified ver sion of the Library The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow Pay close attention to the differ ence between a work based on the library and a work that uses the library The former contains code derived from the library whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License also called this License Each licensee is addressed as you A library means a collection of software functions and or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with applica tion programs which use some of those functions and data to form executables The Library below refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed und
277. the TV s default mode e Store Demo mode is the optimal setting for store environments If a user modifies image quality data Store Demo mode initializes the product to the image quality set by us after a certain period of time f The mode Home Use Store Demo can be changed by executing Mode Setting in the OPTION menu g When France is selected for Country password is not 0 0 0 O but 1 Z 3 4 PROGRAMME SELECTION D Press the P Y or NUMBER buttons to select a programme number VOLUME ADJUSTMENT a Press the 1 or button to adjust the volume 2 If you wish to switch the sound off press the MUTE button You can cancel this function by pressing the MUTE 1 or AV Mode button TOYLNOOD ANWVESDOdd AL ONIHOLVM N TOYLNOO ANWVESDOdd AL ONIHOLVM E WATCHING TV PROGRAMME CONTROL QUICK MENU Your TV s OSD On Screen Display may differ slightly from that shown in this manual Q Menu Quick Menu is a menu of features which users might use frequently Aspect Ratio Selects your desired picture for mat For Zoom Setting select 14 9 Zoom and Cinema Zoom in Ratio Menu After complet ing Zoom Setting the display goes back to Q Menu Clear Voice Il By differentiating the human sound range from others it helps users lis ten to human voices better Z Picture Mode Selects your desired Picture Mode 8 Sound Mode It is a feature to automatical
278. the previous menu screen PAL I U K Ireland Hong Kong South Africa DK PAL D K SECAM D K East Europe China Africa CIS e To store another channel repeat steps 4 to 9 JOYLNOO ANWVESDOdd AL ONIHOLVM g TOYLNOO ANWVESDOdd AL ONIHOLVM E WATCHING TV PROGRAMME CONTROL t SETUP e Auto Tuning e Manual Tuning e Programme Edit e Auto Tuning e Manual Tuning lt Cable TV gt e Programme Edit e Storage e Storage 3 e Booster e System e System BG e Cl Information e Band e Band V UHF e Channel e Channel 0 e Booster Of e Cl Information e Fine lt gt e Fine lt gt e Search Firs e Search A e Name 0p e Name G02 Store Store Close Close m Assigning a station name You can assign a station name with five characters to each programme number Select the position and make Select SETUP your choice of the second a character and so on You can use an the alphabet Select Manual Tuning A to Z the number 0 to 9 and blank e gt Select TV or Cable TV JEE PONP Select Name SO ee m Fine Tuning Normally fine tuning is only necessary if reception is poor s i Select SETUP Select Fine L gt Select Manual Tuning ay e gt Select TV or Cable TV D and sound Select Store e Press the MENU EXIT button to retur
279. to standby You can turn the light of the remote control button on or off Adjust the Energy Saving mode of the TV gt p 138 It helps you select and set images and sounds when connecting AV devices gt p 66 External input mode rotate in regular sequence gt p 57 Selects Radio TV and DTV programme Selects a menu Clears all on screen displays and returns to TV viewing from any menu gt p 31 Select the desired NetCast menu source gt p 68 AccuWeather Picasa YouTube and etc NetCast menu source can differ by country Select the desired quick menu source Aspect Ratio Clear Voice Il Picture Mode Sound Mode Audio or Audio Language Sleep Timer Skip Off On USB Device p 30 Allows you to navigate the on screen menus and adjust the system settings to your preference Accepts your selection or displays the current mode Allows the user to move return one step in an inter active application EPG or other user interaction function Clears all on screen displays and returns to TV viewing from any menu Shows programme guide gt p 129 INFO Shows the present screen information AD Switches the Audio Description On or Off APP Select the MHP TV menu source Only Italy Only 42 47LE7380 LIGHT eD AVMODE INPUT S 7 O to 9 number Selects a programme button Selects numbered items in a menu Space Opens an empty space on the screen keyboard LIST Disp
280. trol gt Rotate Rotate photos Rotates the photo 90 180 270 360 clockwise a It can not be rotate when the width of a picture is bigger than supported height p JZ 1 gt You can view the photo in Full or Original mode gt eg Press the ENERGY SAVING button repeatedly to change the brightness of your screen Refer to p 138 gt Option Set values for Slide Speed and BGM m Use Y lt gt button and OK button to set values Press OK to save the settings a You cannot change BGM while BGM is playing You can only select the MP3 folder saved on the device that currently displays the photo gt Hide Hide the menu on the full sized screen To see the menu again on the full sized screen press OK button to display Press the EXIT button to go back to Photo List Using the Photo List function m Image shown may differ from your TV 1a 2008 12 10 1920 x 1080 479 KB Choose options Set Photo View Set Video Set Audio Close Slideshow BGM B e MEM Option fe Hide pf Exit or fee Show the Option menu Select Set Photo View Set Video Set Audio or Set 3D video Only 42 47LX6 47 55LX9 50 60PX9 NOTE gt Option values changed in Movie List does not affect Photo List and Music List gt Option value changed in Photo List and Music List are changed likewise in Photo List and Music List excluding Movie List gt
281. tton to move to the previous menu screen 176 TELETEXT Image shown may differ from your TV This feature is not available in all countries TE FAV CHARINUM o l RATIO Ratio MUTE x Teletext is a free service broadcast by most TV stations which gives up to the minute information on news weather television programmes share prices and many other topics The teletext decoder of this TV can support the SIMPLE TOP and FASTEXT systems SIMPLE standard teletext consists of a number of pages which are selected by directly entering the corresponding page number TOP and FASTEXT are more modern methods allowing quick and easy selection of teletext information SWITCH ON OFF Press the TEXT button to switch to teletext The initial page or last page viewed appears on the screen Two page numbers TV station name date and time are displayed on the screen headline The first page number indicates your selection while the sec ond shows the current page displayed Press the TEXT button to switch off teletext The previous mode reappears SIMPLE TEXT Page selection Enter the desired page number as a three digit number with the NUMBER buttons If during selec tion you press a wrong number you must complete the three digit number and then re enter the correct page number The P button can be used to select the preceding or following page 1X31qJ131L E 177 1X31qJ131L E 178 TELETE
282. ull compliance 9 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permis sion to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Library or any work based on the Library you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it 10 Each time you redistribute the Library or any work based on the Library the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and condi tions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License 11 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the con ditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to sat isfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all
283. under the terms of this License either on the same media as an Executable version or via an accepted Electronic Distribution Mechanism to anyone to whom you made an Executable version available and if made available via Electronic Distribution Mechanism must remain available for at least twelve 12 months after the date it initially became available or at least six 6 months after a subsequent version of that particular Modification has been made available to such recipients You are responsible for ensuring that the Source Code version remains available even if the Electronic Distribution Mechanism is maintained by a third party 3 3 Description of Modifications You must cause all Covered Code to which You contribute to contain a file documenting the changes You made to create that Covered Code and the date of any change You must include a prominent statement that the Modification is derived directly or indirectly from Original Code provided by the Initial Developer and including the name of the Initial Developer in a the Source Code and b in any notice in an Executable version or related documentation in which You describe the origin or ownership of the Covered Code 3 4 Intellectual Property Matters a Third Party Claims If Contributor has knowledge that a license under a third party s intellectual property rights is required to exercise the rights granted by such Contributor under Sections 2 1 or 2 2 Contributor must include a tex
284. urce Aspect Ratio Clear Voice Il Picture Mode Sound Mode Audio or Audio Language Sleep Timer Skip Off On USB Device p 30 Allows you to navigate the on screen menus and adjust the system settings to your preference Accepts your selection or displays the current mode Allows the user to move return one step in an inter active application EPG or other user interaction function Clears all on screen displays and returns to TV viewing from any menu Shows programme guide gt p 129 INFO Shows the present screen information AD APP Select the MHP TV menu source Only Italy Only 32 37 42LE48 32 37 42 47 55LE58 32 37 42 47 55LE78 42 47 55LE88 Switches the Audio Description On or Off A 9 NOILVdaVdsdd E A 10 PREPARATION ENERGY AVMODE INPUT eg LIGHT ENERGY AVMODE INPUT 2066 SAVING moe ESA A 2 CA MUTE3 mnb Ce Beeeeeeeeececeeeeeeee A O to 9 number Selects a programme button Selects numbered items in a menu Space Opens an empty space on the screen keyboard LIST Displays the programme table gt p 55 Q VIEW Returns to the previously viewed programme Coloured These buttons are used for teletext on TELETEXT buttons models only Programme edit SIMPLINK See a list of AV devices connected to TV When you toggle this button the Simplink menu appears at the screen gt p 62 Direct access to
285. ure Command j u gt To adjust picture position and minimize image shaking automatically It works only in RGB PC mode Transmission DUJE Set ID Data Cr Data 01 To set Ack u Set ID OK NG Datal x 20 Tune Command Command m a gt Select channel to following physical number Transmission m a Set ID DataO Data1 Data2 Cr Data00 High channel data Data01 Low channel data ex No 47 gt 00 2F 2FH No 394 gt 01 8A 18AH DTV No 0 gt Don t care Data02 0x00 Analogue Main 0x10 DTV Main 0x20 Radio Channel data range Analogue Min 00 to Max 63 0 to 99 Digital Min 00 to Max 3E7 0 to 999 Except For Sweden Finland Norway Denmark Ireland Digital Min 00 to Max 270F 0 to 9999 Only Sweden Finland Norway Denmark Ireland Ack a Set ID OK NG Data x Data Min 00 to Max 7DH 21 Programme Add Skip Command m b gt To set skip status for the current Programme Transmission m b Set ID Data Cr Data 00 Skip 01 Add Ack b Set ID OK NG Data x Real data mapping 1 Step 0 Step 10 Set ID 10 Step 15 Set ID 15 Step 16 Set ID 16 Step 100 Step 110 Step 115 Step 116 Step 199 Step 254 Step 255 XIGNAddV 7 N 07 XIGNAddV i 208 APPENDIX 22 Key Command m c gt To send IR remote key code Transmission m c Set ID Data Cr Data Key code
286. ure will not work e Select levels from 6 to 6 Select Clear Voice Il Select On or Off Adjustment for Clear Voice Level With selecting On p Select Level Gen Make desired adjustment e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen TOHLNOO 3J39YN NY1 8 ANNOS E 155 JOYLNOOD ADVNONVT 8 ANNOS E 156 SOUND amp LANGUAGE CONTROL PRESET SOUND SETTINGS SOUND MODE You can select your preferred sound setting Standard Music Cinema Sport or Game and you can also adjust the Treble Bass Sound Mode lets you enjoy the best sound without any Special adjustment as the TV sets the appro priate sound options based on the programme content Standard Music Cinema Sport and Game are preset for optimum sound quality at the factory Standard Offers standard quality sound Music Optimizes sound for listening to music Cinema Optimizes sound for watching movies Sport Optimizes sound for watching sports events Game Optimizes sound for playing games e Auto Volume 2 Or e Clear Voice II Off 3 Fl Balance 0 Off of 3 Y Standard e e Sound Mode Standard gt e Infinite Sound Off e Treble Standard e Infinite Sound e Treble e Bass e Rocet tS e Racot e You can also adjust Sound Mode in the Q gt Select AUDIO Menu Select Sound Mode
287. urrounding conditions Except for 32 37 42LD4 e aps Auto Power Saving Maximize reducting the power consumption without hurting the pic ture quality Plasma TV Only e If you adjust Picture Mode IHX Cinema EX Bright Room Energy Saving Intelligent Sensor Minimum Medium Maximum feature will not work Plasma TV Only e If you adjust Picture Mode IHX Cinema IEX Bright Room Energy Saving Auto Minimum Medium Maximum feature will not work 42 47 55LE8 Only e If you adjust Picture Mode ars Energy Saving Off Minimum Medium Maximum feature will not work Plasma TV only THX Cinema 42 47 55LE8 Plasma TV Only This is cinema quality mode to provide you the experience of watching a movie at home The user will be able enjoy the best level of satisfactory screen quality in any movie without any separate adjustments Cinema expresses the optimal screen quality when it is darkest When selecting HEX Cinema EX Bright Room Aspect ratio changes to Just scan IHX Cinema Thomlinson Holman s Experiment is the audio and video certification standard of THX established by George Lucas who directed the movie Star Wars and Thomlinson This is the product to be certified in THX display area and guarantees screen quality that exceeds the display standard specification in both hardware and software MANUAL PICTURE ADJUSTMENT Picture Mode User option Backlight LCD TV LED LCD TV only To
288. ust restart the Initializing setup When the Lock System menu is On the message to enter the password appears OPTION e Language Language e Country UK e Disability Assistance to B e Disability Assistance gt OPTION e Language Language e Country AWK i Power Indicator a SetiD 4 e Mode Setting Home Use e IR Blaster Off All user settings and channel settings will be reset Still Continue Select OPTION e In Lock System On if you forget your password press 0 3 2 5 on the remote control handset Select Factory Reset Select Yes e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen JOYLNOO ANWVESDOdd AL ONIHOLVM E 67 ISVOLAN E 68 NETCAST LEGAL NOTICE t NETWORK e Network Setting Wired e Network Status Internet is connected A e Legal Notice Select NETWORK Check Legal notice Legal Notice Page 1 3 IMPORTANT NOTICE RELATING TO NETWORK SERVICE All content and services accessible through this device belong to third parties and are protected by copyright patent trademark and or other intellectual property laws Such content and services are provided solely for your personal noncommercial use You may not use any content or services in a manner that has not been authorized by the content owner or service provider Without l
289. utted screen may differ from the original When more than one TV is connected to a single server in DLNA mode a file may not play properly depending on the server performance If the play time information is not provided by the server it is displayed as When using Movie List DRM tp trp files in the DLNA server cannot be played gt The MPO file in DLNA server is not played when Photo List is in operation gt DLNA operation may not work properly according to the AP manufacturers Installing Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials is easy to use DLNA server software for Windows Requirement PC system before you install Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials m Windows XP Service Pack 2 or higher Windows Vista no Service Pack required Windows XP Media Center Edition 2005 Service Pack 2 or higher Windows Server 2003 m Windows Vista 64 bit edition application runs in 32 bit mode m Hard drive space 200 MB hard drive space for a typical installation of Nero MediaHome stand alone m 1 2 GHz Intel Pentium Ill or AMD Sempron 2200 processors m Memory 256 MB RAM m Graphics card with at least 32 MB video memory minimum resolution of 800 x 600 pixels and 16 bit colour settings m Windows Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher m DirectX 9 0c revision 30 August 2006 or higher m Network environment 100 Mb Ethernet WLAN IEEE 802 11 b g n IEEE 802 11 n Except for Russia
290. vice Operator menu differs depending on number of Service Operator supported by each country and if number of supported Service Operator for each country is 1 corresponding function becomes non activation After changing Service Operator a warning window saying that channel map will be deleted when OK button is pressed or Close is selected and a Auto tuning pop up window appears when YES is selected t t SETUP e Auto Tuning SETUP e Auto Tuning e Manual Tuning L o e Programme Edit Service Operator lt Comhem gt 6 T e Manual Tuning e Programme Edit e Booster Off e CI Information e Cable DTV Setting Booster F Channel Auto Update oor e Cl Information e Cable DTV Setting Close e If you select Cable you can see Cable Select SETUP DTV Setting menu e When Channel Auto Update is On you can update information for all the pro grammes that can be updated including the programme currently being watched a Select Service Operator or Channel e When Channel Auto Update is Off you bs Auto Update can only update information for the pro gramme currently being watched 7 e You can not select the Cable DTV Setting Select your desired Source pii n when the service operator is set to Ziggo Except for 42 47LX6 47 55LX9 Select Cable DTV Setting 50 60PX9 e Press the MENU EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing e Press the
291. ware developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org XIGNAddV 7 N 09 i o XIGNAddV APPENDIX m pixman e copyright 1987 1988 1989 1998 The Open Group e copyright 1987 1988 1989 Digital Equipment Corporation e copyright 1999 2004 2008 Keith Packard e copyright 2000 SuSE Inc e copyright 2000 Keith Packard member of The XFree86 Project Inc e copyright 2004 2005 2007 2008 Red Hat Inc e copyright 2004 Nicholas Miell e copyright 2005 Lars Knoll amp Zack Rusin Trolltech e copyright 2005 Trolltech AS e copyright 2007 Luca Barbato e copyright 2008 Aaron Plattner NVIDIA Corporation e copyright 2008 Rodrigo Kumpera e copyright 2008 Andr Tupinamb e copyright 2008 Mozilla Corporation e copyright 2008 Frederic Plourde portmap copyright 1983 1991 The Regents of the University of California tiff copyright 1987 1993 1994 The Regents of the University of California tinyxml copyright 2000 2006 Lee Thomason xyssl e copyright 2006 2008 Christophe Devine e copyright 2009 Paul Bakker zlib copyright 1995 2005 Jean loup Gailly and Mark Adler All rights reserved Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction includ ing without limitation the rights to us
292. with a Scramble Programme Displayed with a HE AAC Programme WD Displayed with a Dolby Digital Programme Aspect ratio of broadcasting programme MIb Displayed with a Dolby Digital Plus Programme Aspect ratio of broadcasting programme 576i p 720p 1080i p Resolution of broadcasting programme Broadcasted programme with the icon may not be displayed in Monitor Out depending on the informa tion of the programme JQOW IWLISIC NI JdIND AWNVYDONd DINOYLO314 9d3 e BE xi C bad Displayed with a MHP Programme Shows next programme information et Shows other programme information Tyra 2 Tv2 28 Sep 2008 21 00 00 00 DTV 2 TV2 Record vPr Change Now Schedule Remind Wie 21 00 00 00 Show Game Show Talk show host Tyra Banks sits down with Keyshia Cole the cast of Gossip Girl and Rihanna Talk show host Tyra Banks sits down with Keyshia Cole the cast of Gossip Girl and Rihanna A pop up window for record remind settings appear one select Timer Record Remind setting mode 129 JQOW IWLISIC NI i JdIND AWNVYDONd DINOYLO314 9d3 130 EPG ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE Switch on off EPG Switch on or off EPG Select a programme Select desired programme Button Function in NOW NEXT Guide Mode You can view a programme being broadcasted and one scheduled to follow Change EPG mode Enter Manual Timer mode Enter Schedule List mode When NOW i
293. work Status Internet is Previous setting value exists you want to connect with the previous setting Wired network is recommended the Network Setting Do Wireless Appeared when wired and wireless W are simultaneously connected IP Auto Setting Network Setting Network Status Select the IP setting mode IP Mode lt IP Auto Setting gt e IP Address 259 200 a 0 0 mer e Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 e Gateway 255 255 0 0 e DNS Server 250m PAS 0 O OK de Previous Setting Select NETWORK Select Network Setting Select Wired resets the current network settings Select IP Auto Setting or IP Manual Setting When Selecting IP Manual Setting IP addresses will need to be input manually Select OK Resetting IP Manual Setting Network Setting Insert the IP address IP Mode e IP Address e Subnet Mask e Gateway e DNS Server lt IP Manual Setting gt 200 200 00 AC 209 2004050 2902000 20 OK da Previous If you already set Network Setting Select Resetting The new connection settings 200 200 0540 This feature requires an always on broadband internet connection You do not need to connect to a PC to use this function If Network Setting is not working check your network conditions Check the LAN cable and make sure your router has DHCP turned
294. x 76 8 mm with stand 20 9 kg 20 9 kg without stand 18 2 kg 18 2 kg Power requirement AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz Weight Power Consumption 250 W 250 W CI Module Size Width x Height x Depth 100 0 mm x 55 0 mm x 5 0 mm Operating 0 C to 40 C Temperature l en Less than 80 Environment condition Operating Humidity Storage Temperature 20 C to 60 C Storage Humidity Less than 85 Supported movie files Refer to p 96 to 97 m The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement XIGNAddV i 19 NWO D SKS 32LD840 ZA 32LD840N ZA 32LD880 ZA 32LD890 ZA Dimensions Width x Height x Depth with stand without stand with stand Weight J without stand Power requirement AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz Power Consumption 150 W MEDEL 37LD840 ZA 37LD840N ZA 37LD880 ZA 37LD890 ZA Dimensions with stand 922 0 mm x 640 0 mm x 260 0 mm a S i a E E E AT Depth without stand 922 0 mm x 568 0 mm x 77 3 mm eee a PP E IEE EIEE A ES Weight J without stand 11 3 kg Power requirement AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz Power Consumption 170 W sesosscossosesoossceeooosecoscsosceoososesecosesesooosocososesocssosesocssocsssosscosesesecosocesososocesoseseossosesocssocesosesoossosesoosesoccoosecosososecososesocosocosososoecososesoossscesoossosssooseeo CI Module Size Width x Height x Depth 0 C to 40 C Less than 80 Operating Temper
295. your internet portal of entertainment and news services developed by Orange Only France GN TELETEXT These buttons are used for teletext BUTTONS For further details see the Teletext section gt p 177 SUBTITLE Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode ENERGY AVMODE INPUT e LIGHT ENERGY AVMODE INPUT g SAVING VOLUME UP DOWN MARK FAV CHAR NUM RATIO FAV E 2 a e MUTE nOr DELETE MUTE Programme UP DOWN PAGE UP DOWN SIMPLINK MY MEDIA Menu control buttons G Ce GT Ag d Adjusts the volume Select the input to apply the Picture Wizard settings Check and un check programmes in the USB menu NOILVaVdsdd 7 Displays the selected favourite programme Shifts the Character or Number for NetCast menu Selects your desired Aspect Ratio of picture gt p 135 Deletes the entered character when entering the character on the screen keyboard Switches the sound on or off Selects a programme Move from one full set of screen information to the next one Controls SIMPLINK or MY MEDIA menu Photo List Music List and Movie List Installing Batteries Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install the batteries matching correct polarity with with m Install two 1 5 V AAA batteries Do not mix old or used batter ies with new ones m Close cover To remove the batteries perform the in
296. ystem For further information contact http www kens ington com the internet homepage of the Kensington company Kensington sells security systems for expensive electronic equipment such as note book PCs and LCD projectors NOTE gt The Kensington Security System is an optional accessory gt If the TV feels cold to the touch there may be a small flicker when it is turned on This is normal there is nothing wrong with TV gt Some minute dot defects may be visible on the screen appearing as tiny red green or blue spots However they have no adverse effect on the monitor s performance gt Avoid touching the LCD screen or holding your finger s against it for long periods of time Doing so may produce some temporary distortion effects on the screen CAREFUL INSTALLATION ADVICE m You should purchase necessary components to fix the TV safety and secure to the wall on the market Position the TV close to the wall to avoid the possibility of it falling when pushed m The instructions shown below are a safer way to set up the TV by fixing it to the wall avoid ing the possibility of it falling forwards if pulled This will prevent the TV from falling forward and causing injury This will also prevent the TV from damage Ensure that children do not climb or hang from the TV Use the eye bolts or TV brackets bolts to fix the product to the wall as shown in the picture If your TV has bolt

LG 42LE4900 42" Full HD Black LCD TV

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

LG 42LE4900 42&quot; Full HD Black LCD TV

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

LG 42LE4900 42" Full HD Black LCD TV